X4
Owner's Manual for the vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable trip.
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.
Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
© 2016 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID4 VI/16, 07 16 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 252.
6 Information
At a glance
14 Cockpit
18 iDrive
27 Voice activation system
30 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Controls
34 Opening and closing
51 Settings
62 Transporting children safely
66 Driving
82 Displays
98 Lights
103 Safety
127 Driving stability control systems
134 Driving comfort
157 Climate control
165 Interior equipment
173 Storage compartments
Driving tips
180 Things to remember when driving
184 Loading
187 Saving fuel
Mobility
196 Refueling
198 Fuel
200 Wheels and tires
216 Engine compartment
219 Engine oil
223 Coolant
225 Maintenance
227 Replacing components
236 Breakdown assistance
242 Care
Reference
248 Technical data
251 Appendix
252 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the fol‐
lowing Owner's Manuals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
on the Control Display.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Additional sources of
information
Dealer’s service center
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
additional questions at any time.
Internet
Owner's Manual and general information about
BMW, such as about the technology, in the In‐
ternet: www.bmwusa.com.
BMW Driver’s Guide App
The Owner's Manual is available
in many countries as an app. Ad‐
ditional information on the Inter‐
net:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Seite 6
Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out
in the defined order.
1. First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
ternative possibilities are presented as list with
bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes
and illustrates features and functions that are
not available in your vehicle, e.g., because of
the selected optional features or the country-
specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable country provisions must be ob‐
served.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some control ele‐
ments are arranged differently from what is
shown in the illustrations.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
Own safety
Intended use
Observe the following when using the vehicle:
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
▷ The laws and safety standards applicable
in the country, where the vehicle is driven.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu‐
ments.
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
Seite 7
Information
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
ments applying in the country of first delivery,
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might be
necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and permit re‐
quirements. If your vehicle does not comply
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
formation on warranty is available from a
dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose
to use another service facility, BMW recom‐
mends use of a facility that performs work, e.g.,
maintenance and repair, according to BMW
specifications with properly trained personnel,
referred to in this Owner's Manual as "another
qualified service center or repair shop".
If work, e.g., maintenance and repair, is per‐
formed improperly, there is a risk of subse‐
quent damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐
cessory products approved by BMW.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice
on their use and installation are available from
a BMW dealer's service center.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested
by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
vehicles.
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
sories.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐
ual product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
whether these products are suitable for BMW
vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
Seite 8
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
Many electronic components on your vehicle
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
and faults. This technical information generally
records the state of a component, a module, a
system or the environment:
▷ Operating states of system components,
e.g., fill levels.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from
its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐
tion speed, wheel speed, deceleration,
transverse acceleration.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or en‐
gagement of the stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
pair services, service processes, warranty
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
mation can be read out from the event and
fault memories by employees of a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,
using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain
further information there if you need it. After an
error is corrected, the information in the fault
memory is deleted or overwritten on a continu‐
ous basis.
With the vehicle in use there are situations
where you can associate this technical data
with individuals if combined with other infor‐
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with
the assistance of an expert.
Additional functions that are contractually
agreed with the customer — such as vehicle
emergency locating — allow certain vehicle
data to be transmitted from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
Seite 9
Information
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
Seite 10
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 11
Information
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. Moreover, you will become familiar with
the available control concepts and options
quickly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Functions and controls in the cockpit
1 Rear window safety switch 47
2 Power windows 49
3 Exterior mirror operation 59
4 Opening and closing the tail‐
gate 41
5 Unlock central locking sys‐
tem 38
Locking central locking sys‐
tem 38
6 Lights
Front fog lights 101
Light switch 98
Lights off
Daytime running lights 100
Parking lights 98
Low beams 98
Seite 14
At a glance Cockpit
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 99
Adaptive Light Control 100
High-beam Assistant 101
Instrument lighting 102
7 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 73
High beams, head‐
light flasher 73
High-beam Assistant 101
Roadside parking lights 99
Onboard computer 92
8 Steering wheel buttons, left
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 140
Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐
terrupt 134
Cruise control: store speed
Cruise control: resume speed
Active Cruise Control: reduce
distance
Active Cruise Control: increase
distance
Cruise control rocker switch
9 Instrument cluster 82
10 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source, see Own‐
er's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communication 6
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Voice activation 27
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Thumbwheel for selection lists 91
11 Steering column stalk, right
Wiper 73
Rain sensor 74
Clean the windshield and head‐
lights 75
12 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 67
Auto Start/Stop function 68
13 Horn, entire surface
14 Steering wheel heating 61
15 Adjust the steering wheel 61
16 Unlock hood 216
Seite 15
Cockpit At a glance
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Functions and controls in the center console
1 Control Display 18
2 Glove compartment 173
3 Ventilation 163
4 Hazard warning system 236
Intelligent Safety 112
5 Automatic climate control 157
6 Radio/CD/multimedia, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
nication 6
7 Controller with buttons 19
8 Parking brake 70
9 Automatic Hold 71
10 PDC Park Distance Control 143
Rearview camera 146
Top View 148
Parking assistant 152
Side View 150
HDC Hill Descent Control 129
11 Driving Dynamics Control 131
12 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 127
13 Steptronic transmission 77
Seite 16
At a glance Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
iDrive
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
ated from a central location.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information
systems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary,
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀
Overview of control elements
Operation
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
the equipment version, with touchpad
Control Display
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions.
Do not place objects close to the Control Dis‐
play; otherwise, the Control Display can be
damaged.
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, e.g., due to intense solar radi‐
ation, the brightness may be reduced down to
complete deactivation. Once the temperature
is reduced, e.g., through shadow or climate
control system, the normal functions are re‐
stored.
Switching on
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the controller.
Switching off
1. Press button.
Seite 18
At a glance iDrive
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
2. "Turn off control display"
Controller with navigation system
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller.
1.
Turn.
2. Press.
3. Move in four directions.
Buttons on the controller
Button Function
MENU Opens the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL Opens the Phone menu.
BACK Displays the previous panel.
OPTION Open the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
1.
Turn.
Seite 19
iDrive At a glance
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
2. Press.
3. Move in two directions.
Buttons on the controller
Button Function
MENU Opens the main menu.
AUDIO Open audio menu last listened to,
switch between audio menus.
TEL Opens the Phone menu.
BACK Open previous panel.
OPTION Open the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
Press button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1.
Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Closes current panel and shows previous
display.
Reopens previous display by pressing
BACK button. In this case, the current
panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
Seite 20
At a glance iDrive
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Opens new panel on top of previous
screen.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
displayed.
Options menu
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller.
Selecting functions
1.
"Settings"
2. "Touchpad"
3. Select the desired function.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Interactive map": use the interactive
map.
▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
Seite 21
iDrive At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. For
entries, it may be necessary to change be‐
tween upper and lower-case letters, num‐
bers and characters, refer to page 25.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. The set language
determines what input is possible. Where
necessary, enter special characters via the
controller.
▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, swipe to the right
in the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
in the lower area of the touchpad.
Using the interactive map and Internet
The interactive map in the navigation system
and Internet pages can be moved using the
touchpad.
Function Operation
Move interactive map or
Internet pages.
Swipe into re‐
spective direc‐
tion.
Enlarge/shrink interactive
map or Internet pages.
Drag in or out on
the touchpad with
fingers.
Display the menu or open
a link on the Internet.
Tap once.
Changing settings
You can use the touchpad to change Control
Display settings, e.g., volume. Swipe left or
right accordingly.
Example: setting the clock
Setting the clock
On the Control Display:
1.
Press button. The main menu is dis‐
played.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
Seite 22
At a glance iDrive
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
6. Turn the controller to set the hours, and
then press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes, and
then press the controller.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Signal strength of cellular network.
▷ Phone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols
The symbols are grouped as follows:
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Cellular network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
Symbol Meaning
SMS text message received.
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.
SIM card is missing.
Enter PIN.
Entertainment symbols
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are turned off.
Checking the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the onboard computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when switching to another menu.
Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Switching the split screen on/off
On the Control Display:
1.
Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
On the Control Display:
1.
Press button.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and menu entries.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Without navigation system and
telephone
Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐
tons, refer to the Owner's Manual for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication.
Saving a function
1. Highlight the function via iDrive.
2.
Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately.
This means, e.g., that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves
or use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Seite 24
At a glance iDrive
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Deleting personal data in the
vehicle
Concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
This personal data can be permanently deleted
using iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Personal Profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored Favorites buttons.
▷ Travel and onboard computer information.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, e.g., stored destinations.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, e.g., Favorites, cookies.
▷ Voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 30 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display.
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. "Settings"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete personal data"
5. "Continue"
6. "OK"
Entering letters and numbers
General information
On the Control Display:
1. Turn the controller: select a letter or num‐
ber.
2. Select additional letters or numbers, if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the let‐
ter or number.
Press the controller for an extended
period: delete all letters or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Tip the controller up.
Without navigation system
Select the symbol.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐
tered and letters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry
for which data is available.
Seite 25
iDrive At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ Destination search: place names can be
entered in all languages that are available
on the Control Display.
Seite 26
At a glance iDrive
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Concept
▷ Most functions displayed on the Control
Display can be operated by voice com‐
mands via the voice activation system. The
system supports you with announcements
during input.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the
voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal
instructions to use with the voice activation
system.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
Set the language, refer to page 95.
Using the voice activation
system
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
A command that is recognized by the voice
activation system is announced and dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are possible, operate
the function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
There are short commands for many functions.
You may select list entries such as phone list
entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐
tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the
respective list.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹.
Seite 27
Voice activation system At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
E.g., if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the
commands for the settings are read out loud.
Executing functions using short
commands
Execute functions on the main menu via short
commands. It almost doesn't matter which
menu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands for the voice activation
system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication Owner's Manual.
The list for short commands of the voice acti‐
vation system can be called up via the
Integrated Owner's Manual on the Control Dis‐
play.
Help dialog for the voice activation
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹.
Additional commands for the help dialog:
▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐
tion about the current operating options
and the most important commands for
them.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: announces in‐
formation about the principle of operation
for the voice activation system.
Example: opening the tone
settings
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.
1.
Turn on the Entertainment sound output, if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Via short command
The desired tone settings can also be started
via a short command.
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output, if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Tone‹
Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dialog
or a short version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech type:"
4. Select setting.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Seite 28
At a glance Voice activation system
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Information on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 236, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 29
Voice activation system At a glance
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. It specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle.
Components of the Integrated
Owner's Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or possible access.
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion on how to operate the vehicle, how to use
basic vehicle functions and what to do in case
of a breakdown. This information can also be
displayed while driving.
Search by images
Based on illustrations, image search provides
information and descriptions. This is useful,
e.g., when the terminology for a feature is not
known.
Owner's Manual
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
Select components
1.
Press button.
2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info".
3. Press the controller.
4. Selecting desired range:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Page by page with link access
Turn the controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
Page by page without link access
Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐
ping the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
the controller to browse from page to page.
Scroll back.
Scroll forward.
Seite 30
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Context help - operating instructions
for the currently selected function
The relevant information can be opened di‐
rectly.
Opening via iDrive
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the Options menu:
1.
Press button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
operating instructions
To switch from a function, e.g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last
displayed function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate permanently between the last dis‐
played function and the Owner's Manual re‐
peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every
time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly.
Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via iDrive.
2.
Press selected button for more
than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
mediately.
Seite 31
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Controls
The information in this chapter helps you in
confidently operating your vehicle. All features
and accessories that are useful for driving and
your safety, comfort and convenience are
described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Remote control
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.
Each remote control contains a replaceable
battery. Replace the battery, refer to
page 36.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. Settings, refer to page 45.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Personal Profile, refer to
page 43.
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 225.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. The vehicle can then not be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
remote control with you so that the vehicle can
be opened from the outside.◀
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
1 Unlock
2 Lock
Seite 34
Controls Opening and closing
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
3 Open the tailgate
4 Press briefly: headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture
Press and hold: panic mode
Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 45,
the following access points are unlocked.
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.
In addition, the following functions are exe‐
cuted:
▷ The settings saved in the driver profile, re‐
fer to page 43, are applied.
▷ The interior lights and courtesy lamps are
activated. This function is not available, if
the interior lamps were switched off man‐
ually.
▷ The welcome lights are switched on, if this
function was activated.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 46, is
switched off.
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
ent brightness.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the remote
control is pressed.
Locking
1.
Close the driver's door.
2.
Press button on the remote control.
▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are being locked.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 46, is
switched on.
If the vehicle horn honks twice when you lock
the vehicle, this means that the engine or igni‐
tion is still switched on. In this case, switch off
the engine or the ignition using the Start/Stop
button.
Lock
Press button on the remote control with
the vehicle locked.
This function is not available, if the interior
lamps were switched off manually.
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
ent brightness.
If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐
onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐
tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-
theft warning system, refer to page 47, are
turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐
fore pressing the button again.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, it is possible to specify
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 45.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Seite 35
Opening and closing Controls
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of property damage.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Opening
Press button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching on the headlamp courtesy
delay feature
Briefly press the button on the remote
control.
Set length of time, refer to page 99.
Replacing the battery
1.
Remove the integrated key from the re‐
mote control, refer to page 38.
2. Place the integrated key underneath the
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and
lift the cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2.
3. Using a pointed object, press battery in di‐
rection of arrow and lift it out.
4. Insert a type CR 2450 battery with the pos‐
itive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
New remote controls
New remote controls are available from a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Blocking remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Seite 36
Controls Opening and closing
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 36.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of a mobile device, e.g.,
charging of a mobile phone.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 37.
Starting the engine via emergency
detection of the remote control
1.
Hold the remote control with its back
against the marked area on the steering
column.
2. Start the engine within 10 seconds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and
repeat the procedure.
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without remote control using the integrated
key.
Safety information
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
NOTE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or key can be
damaged. There is a risk of property damage.
Remove the integrated key before pulling the
outside door handle.◀
Seite 37
Opening and closing Controls
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Removing
Press button, arrow 1, and remove key, ar‐
row 2.
Locking/unlocking via the door lock
Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
lock using the integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the ve‐
hicle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via
the door lock.
In order to stop this alarm, unlock vehicle with
the remote control or switch on the ignition, if
needed, through emergency detection of the
remote control, refer to page 37.
Buttons for the central
locking system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
By pressing the button, the vehicle is
locked with the doors closed.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
Unlocking
Pressing the button unlocks the vehi‐
cle.
Unlocking and opening
▷
Press button to unlock the doors
together, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door
handle twice: the first time unlocks the
door, the second time opens it. The other
doors remain locked.
Seite 38
Controls Opening and closing
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
vehicle's interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Open the tailgate.
▷ Opening/closing the tailgate with no-touch
activation.
Functional requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Unlocking
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely, arrow.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Locking
Touch the surface on the door handle of the
driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
your finger for approx. 1 second without grasp‐
ing the door handle.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Convenient closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Closing
Touch the surface on the door handle of the
driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
your finger and hold it there without grasping
the door handle.
This corresponds with pressing and holding
the button on the remote control.
Seite 39
Opening and closing Controls
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
In addition to locking, the windows and the
glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors
fold in.
Opening the tailgate
General information
If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
locked doors are not unlocked.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of property damage.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Opening
Press button next on tailgate.
Opening and closing the tailgate with
no-touch activation
Concept
The tailgate can be opened and closed with
no-touch activation using the remote control
you are carrying. Two sensors detect a for‐
ward-directed foot motion in the center of the
area at the rear of the vehicle and the tailgate
opens and/or closes.
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
tailgate can be opened or closed inadvertently
by an unconscious or alleged recognized foot
movement.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
cle.
If the tailgate is opened with no-touch activa‐
tion, locked doors are not unlocked.
Safety information
WARNING
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts
may be touched, e.g., hot exhaust system.
There is a risk of injury. When moving your
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do
not touch the vehicle.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Seite 40
Controls Opening and closing
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Performing the foot movement
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at
about an arm's length away from the rear
of the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direc‐
tion of travel and immediately pull it back.
With this movement, the leg must pass
through the ranges of both sensors.
Opening
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
The tailgate opens, regardless of whether it
was previously locked or unlocked.
Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐
tem flashes.
Closing
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
The hazard warning system flashes on and an
acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate
closes.
You can interrupt the closing operation by
moving your foot again.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 36.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection by
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity of the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 37.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, it is possible to specify
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 45.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of property damage.
Seite 41
Opening and closing Controls
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Opening and closing
Opening
Adjusting the opening height
You can set how far the tailgate should open.
When adjusting the opening height, ensure
that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm
above the tailgate.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Tailgate"
3. Turn the controller until the desired open‐
ing height is selected.
4. Press the controller.
From the outside
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens
automatically to the adjusted opening height.
From the inside
Press button in the driver's door.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens
automatically to the adjusted opening height.
Canceling the opening operation
The opening procedure is interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
the tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the remote con‐
trol.
▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the
driver's door.
Closing
From the outside
Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
From the inside
Pull and hold the button in the driver
door.
The remote control must be located in the in‐
terior for this function.
From inside the tailgate
Without Comfort Access:
Press button on the inside of the tailgate.
With Comfort Access:
Seite 42
Controls Opening and closing
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the
tailgate.
▷ Press button, arrow 2.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed
for this purpose and the remote control
must be outside of the vehicle in the area
of the tailgate.
Canceling the closing operation
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky move‐
ment.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
the tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door.
Emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The tailgate is unlocked.
Personal Profile
Concept
Using Personal Profile, individual settings for
several drivers can be saved and called up
again at a later time.
General information
There are three driver profiles with which per‐
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐
mote control has one of these driver profiles
assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be
activated. All settings stored in the driver pro‐
file are automatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
meantime by a person with a different remote
control.
Changes to the settings are automatically
saved in the driver profile currently activated.
If another driver profile is selected via iDrive,
the settings saved in it will be applied automat‐
ically. The new driver profile is assigned to the
remote control currently used.
There is an additional profile available that is
not assigned to any remote control: It can be
used to apply settings in the vehicle without
changing the personal driver profiles.
Settings
The settings for the following systems and
functions are saved in the active profile. The
scope of storable settings depends on country
and equipment.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
Seite 43
Opening and closing Controls
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Side View.
▷ Top View.
▷ Head-up Display.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐
tion, steering wheel position.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection.
Profile management
Opening profiles
Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif‐
ferent profile may be activated. This allows you
to call up personal vehicle settings if you did
not unlock the vehicle with your own key.
Via iDrive:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Select a profile.
▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile
are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐
mote control being used at the time.
▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐
ent remote control, this profile will apply to
both remote controls.
Using the guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are saved in none of the three personal pro‐
files.
This can be useful for drivers who are using
the vehicle temporarily and do not have their
own profile.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Guest"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Renaming profiles
A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐
file to avoid confusion between the profiles.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Rename current profile"
Reset profiles
The settings of the active profile are reset to
their factory settings.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reset current profile"
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐
ported.
This can be helpful for saving and retrieving
personal settings, e.g., before delivering the
vehicle to a workshop. Profiles can be taken to
another vehicle equipped with the Personal
Profile function.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
Seite 44
Controls Opening and closing
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
3. "Export profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"
Popular file systems for USB media are sup‐
ported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recom‐
mended formats for profile export. Other for‐
mats may not support the export.
Importing profiles
Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be
imported via BMW Online.
Profiles stored on a USB storage device can be
imported via the USB interface.
Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐
ported profile.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"
Display profile list during start
The profile list can be displayed during each
start to select the desired profile.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Profiles"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display user list at startup"
Settings
General information
Depending on the equipment and country-
specific variant of your vehicle, different open‐
ing and closing settings are available.
These settings are saved in the active driver
profile, refer to page 43.
Unlocking
Doors
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select the desired function:
▷ "Tailgate"
The tailgate is opened.
▷ "Tailgate + door(s)"
The tailgate is opened and the doors
unlocked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn.
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
Seite 45
Opening and closing Controls
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Automatic locking
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
opened after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after start driving"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Adjusting the last seat and mirror
position
1.
"Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
3. "Last seat position autom."
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat
and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐
tions.
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood
or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The alarm system signals these changes visu‐
ally and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
Switching on and off
When you lock and unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or with Comfort Access, the
alarm system is switched on and off at the
same time.
Door lock with the alarm system
switched on
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via
the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 47.
Tailgate with the alarm system
switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again provided the doors are
locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Indicator lamp on the interior mirror
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
Seite 46
Controls Opening and closing
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ Indicator lamp flashes for approx. 10 sec‐
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
When the still open access points are
closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor will be switched on.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi‐
cle is towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthor‐
ized action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control
or switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, re‐
fer to page 37.
▷ With Comfort Access:
If you are carrying the remote control on
your person, grasp the door handle on the
driver's or front passenger door com‐
pletely.
Power windows
Safety information
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
Seite 47
Opening and closing Controls
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Power windows
Safety switch
Opening
▷
Press the button to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
fer to page 35.
Closing
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is
held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically. Pulling
again stops the motion.
Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to
page 39.
Pinch protection system
General information
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as
a window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window reopens slightly.
Safety information
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
The pinch protection is limited and the
window reopens slightly if the closing force
exceeds a certain threshold.
2.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
hold it there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Seite 48
Controls Opening and closing
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Safety switch
General information
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, e.g., from opening
and closing the rear windows using the
switches in the rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
safety function is switched off automatically.
Switching on and off
Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety func‐
tion is switched on.
Glass sunroof, electric
General information
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
operated together or separately using the
same switch.
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
tion is switched on.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Tilting the glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷ The closed glass sunroof is
tilted.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in its tilted
position. The sliding visor
does not move.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
Glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor open together as long as
the switch is held down.
The glass sunroof closes as
long as the switch is held
down. The sliding visor can
be manually closed.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
Seite 49
Opening and closing Controls
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
The glass sunroof and sliding visor open
automatically.
The glass sunroof closes automatically.
The sliding visor can be manually closed.
Pressing the switch upward stops the mo‐
tion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
fer to page 35.
Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to
page 39.
Comfort position
If the glass sunroof is not completely opened
automatically, the comfort position has been
attained. In this position the wind noises in the
interior are the least.
If desired, continue the movement by pressing
the switch.
Pinch protection system
General information
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
the tilted position during closing. The glass
sunroof reopens slightly.
Closing from the open position
without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1.
Press the switch forward beyond the re‐
sistance point and hold.
The pinch protection is limited and the
glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain threshold.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the glass
sunroof closes without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Closing from the raised position
without pinch protection
If there is an external danger,
push the switch forward past the
resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes with‐
out jam protection.
Initializing after a power interruption
General information
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent.
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
During the initialization, the glass sunroof
closes without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing the system
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is com‐
plete:
Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is completed
when the glass sunroof is completely closed.
Seite 50
Controls Opening and closing
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs
of the occupants can make a vital contribution
to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position also plays an important
role in an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 54.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 56.
▷ Airbags.
Seats
Safety information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the protective effect of the safety belt
cannot be ensured anymore. There is a risk of
sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Ad‐
just the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust
the backrest so that it is in the most upright
position as possible and do not adjust again
while driving.◀
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Middle seat
The middle seat is of limited usefulness. It is
recommended that this seat only be used by
persons who can use the backrest as a substi‐
tute for the head restraint.
Manually adjustable seats
Overview
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Seat tilt
4 Backrest width
5 Lumbar support
6 Height
7 Backrest tilt
Seite 51
Settings Controls
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐
ward or back slightly making sure it engages
properly.
Height
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Seat tilt
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired
tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat
engages properly.
Electrically adjustable seats
Overview
1 Seat and mirror memory
2 Backrest width
3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the profile currently used. When the vehicle
is unlocked via the remote control, the position
is automatically retrieved if the function is acti‐
vated for this purpose.
Seite 52
Controls Settings
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch up or down.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
You can change the width of the backrest us‐
ing the side wings to adjust the lateral support.
Seite 53
Settings Controls
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Press button on the corre‐
sponding side.
Front seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐
tomatically with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO is activated, the heater output
is reduced.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Rear seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐
tomatically with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO is activated, the heater output
is reduced.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts
The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en‐
sure occupant safety. However, they can only
offer protection when adjusted correctly.
The two outer safety belt buckles, integrated
into the rear seat, are for passengers sitting on
the left and right.
Seite 54
Controls Settings
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
The center safety belt buckle of the rear seat is
solely intended for the person sitting in the
middle.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐
though airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
Slowly guide the safety belt out of the holder
when fastening it.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
If the safety belt is used by more than
one person, the protective effect of the safety
belt cannot be ensured anymore. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow
more than one person to wear a single safety
belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an
occupant's lap, but must be transported and
respectively secured in designated child re‐
straint systems.◀
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
safety belt can cause additional injuries, e.g., in
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are
wearing safety belts correctly.◀
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
the protective function of the middle safety
belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. If you are using the mid‐
dle safety belt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and as tight
to your body as possible over your lap and
shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips
over your lap. The safety belt may not
press on your stomach.
▷ Do not wear the safety belt on your throat,
rub it on sharp edges, guide it or jam it in
across hard or fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
ward around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help
position the buckle when not in use.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1.
Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and
passenger's seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
Seite 55
Settings Controls
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated
if objects are placed on the front passenger
seat.
Damage to safety belts
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or
changed in any other way.
▷ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily
soiled.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them
clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Front head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury. Install head
restraints on occupied seats prior to driving
and make sure that the center of the head re‐
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
while driving.◀
Correctly adjusted head restraint
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at eye level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting
the tilt of the backrest.
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a cer‐
tain severity, the active head restraint automat‐
ically reduces the distance from the head.
In the event of wear and tear due to an acci‐
dent, or if otherwise damaged, have the active
head restraint checked and if necessary re‐
placed
Seite 56
Controls Settings
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Adjusting the height
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
head restraint down.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury. Install head
restraints on occupied seats prior to driving
and make sure that the center of the head re‐
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
while driving.◀
Correctly adjusted head restraint
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at eye level.
Adjusting the height
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
head restraint down.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Seite 57
Settings Controls
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.
2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
straint out completely.
Seat and mirror memory
Concept
Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
can be stored per profile and called up. Set‐
tings for the backrest width and lumbar sup‐
port are not stored in memory.
Safety information
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected movements of the
seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Only retrieve the memory
function when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Overview
Storing
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Set the desired position.
3.
Press button. The LED in the but‐
ton lights up.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. The LED goes out.
Button was pressed inadvertently:
Press button again.
The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the driver's side is interrupted after a short
time.
Calling up of a seat position
deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open or close the door or tailgate.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Seite 58
Controls Settings
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐
ror setting is stored for the profile currently
used. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
mote control, the position is automatically re‐
trieved if this function is active.
Safety information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, e.g.,
while changing lanes. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic be‐
hind by looking over your shoulder.◀
Overview
1 Settings 59
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out 59
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
Press button.
The mirror movement follows the but‐
ton movement.
Saving positions
The current exterior mirror position can be
stored via the seat and mirror memory.
Adjusting manually
In case of electrical malfunction press edges of
mirror.
Automatic Curb Monitor
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.
Activating
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
position.
Folding in and out
NOTE
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There
is a risk of property damage. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Press button.
Possible at speeds up to approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Seite 59
Settings Controls
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Fold the mirrors in and out is advantageous in
the following situations:
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells are used to con‐
trol the Interior mirror.
Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Turn knob
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
Interior mirror, automatic dimming
feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Seite 60
Controls Settings
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Settings
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
Heated steering wheel
Switching on/off
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Seite 61
Settings Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
The right place for children
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Children should always be in the rear
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Only transport children younger than 13 years
of age or shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm in the rear in
suitable child restraint systems provided in ac‐
cordance with the age, weight and size of the
child. Children 13 years of age or older must
wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child
restraint system can no longer be used due to
their age, weight and size.
Safety information
WARNING
Children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm cannot
correctly fasten the safety belt without suitable
additional restraint systems. The protective ef‐
fect of the safety belts can be limited or lost
when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An
incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause ad‐
ditional injuries, e.g., in the event of an acci‐
dent or during braking and evasive maneuvers.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Se‐
cure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using
suitable restraint systems.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint system in the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
on the front passenger side are deactivated.
Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐
ger airbags, refer to page 105.
Safety information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
Seite 62
Controls Transporting children safely
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
Installing child restraint
systems
General information
Pay attention to the specifications of the child
restraint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
Safety information
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 105.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
ble and bring it as far up as possible to obtain
the best possible position for the belt and to
offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
dent.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
til the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
ten child restraint systems.
Seite 63
Transporting children safely Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child
restraint fixing system.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tems are not correctly engaged, the protective
effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tem can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐
chors are securely engaged and that the
LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐
curely against the backrest.◀
Position
The corresponding symbol shows the
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower anchors are
marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐
bols. It is not recommended to use the
inner lower anchors of standard outer
LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint
system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle
seat belt instead for the middle seat.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint system with a tether
strap
Mounting points
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper top tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Safety information
NOTE
The mounting points for the upper re‐
taining straps of child restraint systems are
only provided for these retaining straps. When
other objects are mounted, the anchors can be
damaged. There is a risk of property damage.
Seite 64
Controls Transporting children safely
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Only mount child restraint systems to the up‐
per retaining straps.◀
Routing the retaining strap
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the mounting point
1.
Raise the head restraint, if needed.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between
the backrest and the cargo cover.
Middle seat: guide the retaining strap
through the belt guide on the top edge of
the rear seat backrest.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Locking the doors and
windows in the rear
Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press button on the driver's door.
The LED lights up if the safety func‐
tion is switched on.
This locks various functions so that they can‐
not be operated from the rear.
Seite 65
Transporting children safely Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Start/Stop button
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off
and starts the engine.
Steptronic transmission: the en‐
gine starts with the brake pedal
pressed when you press the Start/Stop button.
Ignition on
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop
button, and do not press on the brake pedal at
the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied length
of time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Ignition off
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop
button again without stepping on the brake.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Safety measures
When switching off the ignition, the selector
lever position P is selected automatically if the
selector lever position D or R is selected.
The ignition is switched off automatically in the
following situations while the vehicle is station‐
ary and the engine is off:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
low beams are activated.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the low beams are switched off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
with driver's door open and low beams off.
The low beams switch to parking lights after
approx. 15 minutes of no use.
Radio ready state
Activate radio-ready state: when the engine is
running: press the Start/Stop button.
Some electronic systems/power consumers
remain ready for operation.
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
cally in the following situations:
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
tral locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be
started.
Seite 66
Controls Driving
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g.,
the ignition is automatically switched off for the
following reasons:
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
▷ When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio-ready state if the lights
are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped,
the daytime running lights are activated.
Starting the engine
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
NOTE
In the case of repeated starting attempts
or repeated starting in quick succession, the
fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
a risk of property damage. Avoid repeated
starting in quick succession.◀
Steptronic transmission
Starting the engine
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gine starts.
Engine stop
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
Seite 67
Driving Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Before driving into a vehicle wash
So that the vehicle can roll into a vehicle wash,
observe instructions for going into an auto‐
matic vehicle wash, refer to page 242.
Steptronic transmission
Switching off the engine
1.
Engage selector lever position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
engine starts again automatically for driving
off.
General information
After every start of the engine using the Start/
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
the last selected state. When the Auto Start/
Stop function is active, it is available when the
vehicle is traveling faster than about
3 mph/5 km/h.
Engine stop
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
Steptronic transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held
by Automatic Hold.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The display indicates that the
Auto Start/Stop function is
ready for an Automatic engine
start.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The vehicle's interior has not yet been
heated or cooled to the required level.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐
ature.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
Seite 68
Controls Driving
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N,
M/S or R.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ Steptronic transmission: by releasing the
brake pedal.
When Automatic Hold is activated: press
the accelerator pedal.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
Functional limitations
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the vehicle's interior
when the cooling function is switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
lector lever position D to R, N or M/S.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Excessive cooling of the vehicle's interior
when the heating is switched on.
Activating/deactivating the system
manually
Using the button
Press button.
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is
activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e.g., when
leaving it.
Steptronic transmission:
1.
Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
Seite 69
Driving Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐
matically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐
sons, e.g., if no driver is detected.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐
cle from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Parking brake
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
While driving
To use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the switch is being pulled.
Seite 70
Controls Driving
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
The indicator lamp lights up red, a sig‐
nal sounds and the brake lights light
up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.
Releasing
With the ignition switched on:
Steptronic transmission: press the
switch while the brake is pressed or se‐
lector lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release in cars with
Steptronic transmission
For automatic release, step on the accelerator
pedal.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
The parking brake is automatically released
when you step on the accelerator under the
following conditions:
▷ Engine on.
▷ Drive mode engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Automatic Hold
Concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving off.
Overview
Automatic Hold
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Under the following conditions, Automatic
Hold is automatically deactivated and the park‐
ing brake is set:
▷ The engine is switched off.
▷ A door is opened and driver's safety belt is
unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand‐
still using the parking brake.
The indicator lamp switches from
green to red and the letters AUTO H go
out.
Seite 71
Driving Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Activating
This function can be activated when the driv‐
er's door is closed, the safety belt is fastened
and the engine is running.
Press button.
The LED and the letters AUTO H light
up.
The indicator lamp lights up.
Automatic Hold is activated.
Deactivating
Press button again.
The LED and the letters AUTO H go
out.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
When the parking brake is set manually, Auto‐
matic Hold is deactivated automatically.
Driving
Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is au‐
tomatically secured against rolling after brak‐
ing to a standstill.
The indicator lamp lights up green.
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive
off.
The brake is released automatically.
The indicator lamp goes out.
NOTE
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic
Hold engages the parking brake. It prevents
the vehicle from rolling in a vehicle wash.
There is a risk of property damage. Deactivate
Automatic Hold prior to entering the vehicle
wash.◀
Parking
The parking brake is automatically set if the
engine is switched off while the vehicle is be‐
ing held by Automatic Hold.
The indicator lamp changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set if the en‐
gine is switched off while the vehicle is coast‐
ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deactivated.
Automatic Hold remains activated during the
engine stop brought about by the Auto Start/
Stop function.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing using a wheel chock, e.g., when leaving it.
After a power failure
Putting the parking brake into
operation
1.
Switch on the ignition.
Seite 72
Controls Driving
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
2.
Press the switch while stepping on
the brake pedal or selector lever position P
is set.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be
put into operation. Any sounds associated with
this are normal.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights
on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
The lever returns into its starting position after
actuation.
To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to
the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated.
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Seite 73
Driving Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of property damage. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Switching on
Tap the lever up or press it beyond the resist‐
ance point.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.
Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐
hicle comes to standstill.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
down twice.
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once.
▷ Single wipe: press down once.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di‐
rectly in front of the interior mirror. Without the
rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper opera‐
tion is preset.
Safety information
NOTE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of property damage.
Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
Seite 74
Controls Driving
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Activating/deactivating
Press button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started.
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor:
LED in wiper lever lights up.
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐
tion is deactivated.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Windshield and headlamp washer
system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
the washer system when the washer fluid res‐
ervoir is empty.◀
Cleaning
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐
vated.
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while the ignition is switched on.
Seite 75
Driving Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The wipers can be folded away from the wind‐
shield in the fold-away position.
General information
Important, e.g., when changing the wiper
blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐
tions.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
Folding away the wipers
1.
Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. With frosty conditions, make sure that the
blades are not frozen to the windshield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wipers remain in a nearly
vertical position
4. Lift the wiper all the way off of the wind‐
shield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir.
Use a mixture of tap water, windshield washer
concentrate, and possibly antifreeze for the
windshield washer system.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Observe the
instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Seite 76
Controls Driving
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.◀
NOTE
Silicon-containing additives in the
washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on
the windows can lead to damage to the wash‐
ing system. There is a risk of property damage.
Do not add silicon-containing additives to the
washer fluid.◀
NOTE
Mixing different windshield washer con‐
centrates or antifreeze agents can damage the
washing system. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not mix different windshield
washer concentrates or antifreeze agents. Ob‐
serve the information and mixing ratios pro‐
vided on the containers.◀
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐
centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead
to incorrect readings at temperatures below
+ 5 ℉/- 15 ℃.
Steptronic transmission
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Selector lever positions
D Drive
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
automatically.
R Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
The vehicle may roll in selector lever posi‐
tion N, e.g., in vehicle washes.
P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally in the following situations:
▷ After the engine is switched off when the
vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to
page 66, or when the ignition is switched
off, refer to page 66, and when selector
lever position R or D is set.
Seite 77
Driving Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the
driver's door is opened, and the brake
pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is
stationary and selector lever position D
or R is engaged.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Step on the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
position.
Engaging selector lever positions
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake
pedal until you are ready to start.
▷ It is not possible to shift out of selector
lever position P until the engine is running
and the brake is applied.
▷ With the vehicle stationary, depress the
brake pedal before shifting out of selector
lever position P or N; otherwise, the shift
block will not be deactivated and the shift
command will not be executed.
Selector lever lock
A lock prevents the inadvertent switching to
selector lever position P or R or the inadvertent
change from selector lever position P.
To release the lock: press button, arrow.
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R
With the driver's safety belt fastened, tap the
selector lever in the desired direction, beyond
a resistance point, if needed.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to
its center position.
Engaging selector lever position P
Press P button, arrow.
Sport program and manual mode
Activating the sport program
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐
tor lever position D.
Seite 78
Controls Driving
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Activating the M/S manual mode
1. Press the selector lever to the left out of
selector lever position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward.
Manual mode M/S becomes active and the
gear is changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
If the situation requires, the Steptronic trans‐
mission continues to shift automatically.
Example: once maximum engine speed is at‐
tained, M/S manual mode is automatically up‐
shifted as needed.
Switching to manual mode
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐
sible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐
lected gear.
Not X4 M40i: Steptronic Sport
transmission: preventing automatic
upshifting in M/S manual mode
The Steptronic Sport transmission does not
automatically upshift in M/S manual mode
once the maximum speed is reached, if one of
the following conditions is met:
▷ DSC deactivated.
▷ TRACTION activated.
▷ SPORT+ activated.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐
down.
With the respective transmission version, the
lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
taneously operating the kickdown and the left
shift paddles. This is not possible, when
switching briefly via the shift paddles from se‐
lector lever position D to manual mode M/S.
X4 M40i: preventing automatic
upshifting in M/S manual mode
Once particular engine speeds are attained,
upshifting is not automatically performed in
M/S manual mode.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐
down.
The lowest possible gear is selected by simul‐
taneously operating the kickdown and the left
shift paddles.
This is not possible, when switching briefly via
the shift paddles from selector lever position D
to manual mode M/S.
Ending the sport program/manual
mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
Seite 79
Driving Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ With the respective transmission version,
the lowest possible gear can be selected
by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐
sible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the
transmission switches to manual mode tempo‐
rarily in selector lever position D and perma‐
nently in selector lever position S.
In selector lever position D, after conservative
driving for a certain amount of time in manual
mode or if there has been no acceleration or
shifting of the shift paddles within a certain
amount of time, the transmission switches
back to automatic mode.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example: P.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the
engine.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll‐
ing away.
Engaging selector lever position N
1.
Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
must audibly start.
3. Press the button on the selector lever, see
arrow 1, and press and hold the selector
lever into selector lever position N, see ar‐
row N, until selector lever position N is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
A corresponding Check Control message
is displayed.
4. Release the selector lever.
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter
stops.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
For additional information, see chapter Tow-
starting and towing.
Steptronic Sport transmission:
Launch Control
Concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 180, period.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
Seite 80
Controls Driving
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Start with launch control
While the engine is running:
1.
Press button or select Sport+ with
the Driving Dynamics Control.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF
lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position, kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐
mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used
again.
Seite 81
Driving Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 87
2 Speedometer
3 Messages, for example, Check Control
4 Tachometer 87
5 Engine oil temperature 87
6 Current fuel consumption
7 Electronic displays 82
8 Reset miles 87
Electronic displays
▷ Selection lists, refer to page 91.
▷ External temperature, refer to page 87.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 68.
▷ On-board computer, refer to page 92.
▷ Date, refer to page 88.
▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 89.
▷ Transmission display, refer to page 80.
▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 87.
Seite 82
Controls Displays
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ Messages, e.g., Check Control, refer to
page 83.
▷ Navigation display, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
cation.
▷ Range, refer to page 88.
▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to
page 131.
▷ Service requirements, refer to page 89.
▷ Speed Limit Info, refer to page 90.
▷ Time, refer to page 88.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
text message may appear on the Control Dis‐
play.
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
nations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Safety belt on the driver's side is not
buckled. For some country-specific
models: passenger belt is not worn or
objects are detected on the front passenger
seat.
Indicator lamp flashes or is illuminated: safety
belt on the driver or passenger side is not
buckled. The safety belt reminder can also be
activated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
senger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
For additional information, see Releas‐
ing the parking brake, refer to page 71.
Brake system
Braking system impaired. Continue to
drive moderately.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Approach control warning
Indicator lamp illuminates: advance
warning is issued, for example when
there is the impending danger of a col‐
lision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is
too small.
Increase distance.
Indicator lamp flashes: acute warning of the
imminent danger of a collision when the vehi‐
cle approaches another vehicle at a relatively
high differential speed.
Seite 83
Displays Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Person warning
Symbol in the instrument cluster.
If a collision with a person detected in
this way is imminent, the symbol lights
up and a signal sounds.
Orange lights
Active Cruise Control
The number bars shows the selected
distance from the vehicle driving
ahead.
For additional information, refer to Active
Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, ACC,
refer to page 134.
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
Indicator lamp illuminates: a vehicle has
been detected ahead of you.
Indicator lamp flashes: the conditions
are not adequate for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Braking force boost may not be work‐
ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon‐
ger braking distance into account.
Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces. The
vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and
adapt driving style to the driving circumstan‐
ces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has mal‐
functioned.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 127.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Control is activated
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deac‐
tivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol is activated.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 127, and
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 128.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
neuvers.
For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐
fer to page 110.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator lamp is illuminated.
The Tire Pressure Monitor reports a
low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.
Observe the information in the Check Control
message.
Seite 84
Controls Displays
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
The indicator lamp flashes and is then illumi‐
nated continuously.
No flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can
be detected.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor, refer to page 106.
Steering system
Steering system in some cases not
working.
Have the steering system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Engine functions
Engine function impaired.
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
For additional information, refer to On-board
Diagnostics socket, refer to page 226.
Lane departure warning
System is switched on and under cer‐
tain circumstances warns if a detected
lane is left without flashing beforehand.
For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐
ture warning, refer to page 122.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
For additional information, refer to Turn signal,
refer to page 73.
Parking lights, headlight
Parking lights or headlights are acti‐
vated.
For additional information, refer to
Parking lights/low beams, headlamp control,
refer to page 98.
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are activated.
For additional information, refer to
Front fog lights, refer to page 101.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off
automatically depending on the traffic
situation.
For additional information, refer to High-beam
Assistant, refer to page 101.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the con‐
trol elements on the steering wheel.
Seite 85
Displays Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Automatic Hold
Automatic Hold is activated. The vehi‐
cle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
For more information, see Automatic Hold, re‐
fer to page 71.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are activated.
For additional information, see High
beams, refer to page 73.
General lamps
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a
symbol in the instrument cluster explain a
Check Control message and the meaning of
the indicator and warning lights.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Symbols
Within the supplementary text, the following
functions can be selected independent of the
check control message.
▷ Display additional information about
the Check Control message in the
Integrated Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press and hold button on signal lever.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
sages are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed
again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched
off.
Seite 86
Controls Displays
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Fuel gauge
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
Depending on the equipment
version, the arrow beside the
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Notes on refueling, refer to page 196.
The yellow indicator lamp illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted to protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine
and vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the
middle or in the left half of
the temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the temperature range. A Check Control
message is also displayed.
When the engine oil temperature is too
high, a red indicator lamp is displayed.
Coolant temperature
If the coolant along with the engine becomes
too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
A red indicator lamp is displayed.
Check the coolant level.
Odometer and trip odometer
Display
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Show/reset miles
Press the button.
▷ When the ignition is
switched off, the time, the
external temperature and
the odometer are displayed.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
External temperature
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, e.g., on bridges
or shady sections of road. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds.
A Check Control message is
displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Seite 87
Displays Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Time
The time is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The time can be set on the Con‐
trol Display.
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
The date can be set on the Con‐
trol Display.
Range
Display
With a low remaining range:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the onboard com‐
puter.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, e.g., taking
curves aggressively, the engine function is
not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of property
damage. Refuel promptly.◀
Displaying the cruising range
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the range can also be displayed as bar in the
instrument cluster.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Additional indicators"
With navigation system: range with
destination guidance active
If respective equipment is fitted
and destination guidance is ac‐
tive, the remaining range is dis‐
played when the destination is
reached.
Current fuel consumption
Display
Depending on your vehicle's op‐
tional features, the current fuel
consumption can be displayed
as scale with mechanical pointer
or as digital bar display in the
lower area of the tachometer.
The current consumption displays the current
fuel consumption. Check whether you are cur‐
rently driving in an efficient and environmen‐
tally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the current fuel consumption can also be dis‐
played as bar in the instrument cluster.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Additional indicators"
Seite 88
Controls Displays
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Energy recovery
Display
The energy of motion of the ve‐
hicle is converted to electrical
energy while coasting. The vehi‐
cle battery is partially charged
and fuel consumption can be re‐
duced.
Service requirements
General information
After the ignition is turned on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
nance.
A service advisor can read out the current
service requirements from your remote con‐
trol.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Symbols
Sym‐
bols
Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for scheduled mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.
The service deadline has already
passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Adjust the settings.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections is automatically
transmitted to your dealer’s service center be‐
fore a service due date.
You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐
ter was notified.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Seite 89
Displays Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Gear shift indicator
Concept
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation.
General information
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐
try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐
tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐
tronic transmission and with manual
transmission.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Steptronic transmission: displaying
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic
signs with extra symbols for wet road condi‐
tions, etc. are also detected and compared
with the vehicle's onboard data, such as for the
rain sensor, and will be displayed depending
on the situation. The system takes into ac‐
count the information stored in the navigation
system and also displays speed limits present
on routes without signs.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "Speed limit information"
If Speed Limit Info is switched on, it can be dis‐
played on the CID (central information display)
in the instrument cluster via the onboard com‐
puter.
Seite 90
Controls Displays
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Display
The following is displayed in the instrument
cluster:
Speed Limit Info
Current speed limit.
Speed Limit Info not available.
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the
Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
Selection lists in the
instrument cluster
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following can be displayed or operated using
the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steer‐
ing wheel as well as the displays in the instru‐
ment cluster and the Head-up Display:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
1.
Turn the thumbwheel and select the de‐
sired setting.
2. Press the thumbwheel.
Seite 91
Displays Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Display
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the list in the instrument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Onboard computer
Calling up information on the CID
(central information display)
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Information is displayed in the CID (central in‐
formation display) of the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
CID (central information display)
Repeatedly pressing the button
on the turn signal lever calls up
the following information in the
CID (central information display):
▷ Range.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Speed Limit Info.
▷ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Arrow view of navigation system.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
When the arrow view in the Head-up Dis‐
play is inactive.
▷ Compass display in the navigation system.
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
Selecting information
Depending on the vehicle equipment version,
you can select what information from the on‐
board computer is to be displayed on the info
display of the instrument cluster.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. Select the desired information.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the period while the engine is running.
Seite 92
Controls Displays
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
onboard computer.
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Distance to destination
The distance remaining to the destination is
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
gation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
tomatically.
Time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination is en‐
tered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed Limit Info
Further information, see chapter Speed Limit
Info.
Compass
With a navigation system: com‐
pass display for the driving di‐
rection.
Trip onboard computer
The vehicle features two types of onboard
computers.
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an
overview of the current trip.
Resetting the trip onboard computer
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a
standstill.
Display on the Control Display
Display the onboard computer or trip onboard
computer on the Control Display.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Seite 93
Displays Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Sport displays
The concept
On the Control Display, the current values for
performance and torque can be displayed if
the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
Displaying sport displays
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Sport displays"
Speed warning
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued.
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
drops below the set speed limit once by at
least 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
5. Press the controller.
Speed warning is stored.
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the controller.
Setting your current speed as the
speed warning
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
speed warning.
Settings on the Control
Display
Time
Setting the time zone
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:"
4. Select the desired time zone.
The time zone is stored.
Setting the time
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
7. Press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
Seite 94
Controls Displays
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Auto time set"
Date
Setting the date
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1.
"Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Language
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 28.
Units of measurement
Setting the units of measurement
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Brightness
Setting the brightness
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Activating/deactivating the display of
the current vehicle position
If GPS geolocation has been activated, the cur‐
rent vehicle position can be displayed in the
BMW ConnectedDrive app or in the Connec‐
tedDrive customer portal.
1.
"Settings"
Seite 95
Displays Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
2. "GPS tracking"
3. "GPS tracking"
Head-up Display
Concept
This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
Overview
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic set‐
tings checked by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-
up Display, refer to page 245.
Switching on/off
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
5. Press the controller.
When the low beams are activated, the bright‐
ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐
ally influenced using the instrument lighting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Seite 96
Controls Displays
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Adjusting the height
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller until the desired height
is reached.
5. Press the controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Rotation"
4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
5. Press the controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being displayed.
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to
have the special windshield replaced by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Seite 97
Displays Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
Light functions
Symbol Function
Front fog lights
Automatic headlamp control
Adaptive Light Control
Lights off
Daytime running lights
Symbol Function
Parking lights
Low beams
Instrument lighting
Parking lights, cornering
lights and roadside parking
lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off at these switch settings.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and it would then be impossible to start the en‐
gine.
When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐
side parking lamp, refer to page 99.
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
Seite 98
Controls Lights
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Roadside parking lights
Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Welcome lights and
headlamp courtesy delay
feature
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, when switching
off the vehicle, switch position
or .
Depending on the ambient brightness, individ‐
ual light functions may be switched on briefly,
when the vehicle is unlocked.
Activating/deactivating
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome lights"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Headlamp courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while after
the radio-ready state is switched off if the
lights are turned off and the headlight flasher is
switched on.
Setting the duration
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set length of time.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Automatic headlamp control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight or if there is
precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
The low beams always stay on when the fog
lamp is switched on.
Activating
Position of switch:
Seite 99
Lights Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster is
illuminated when the low beams are switched
on.
System limits
The automatic headlamp control cannot serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks un‐
der these conditions, you should always switch
on the lights manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when the
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
tion .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Adaptive Light Control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
General information
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows
the course of the road.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Depending on the equipment version, Adap‐
tive Light Control consists of one or several
systems:
▷ Cornering light, refer to page 100.
▷ Adaptive headlight range control, refer to
page 100.
Activating
Position of switch
with the ignition
switched on.
Corner-illuminating lights
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating
lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
The turning lights are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
When driving in reverse, the turning lights may
be automatically switched on regardless of the
steering angle.
Self-leveling headlights
The self-leveling headlights compensate for
acceleration and braking operations in order
not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve
optimum illumination of the roadway.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Seite 100
Controls Lights
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
High-beam Assistant
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation. The assistant ensures
that the high beams are switched on, when‐
ever the traffic situation allows. In the low
speed range, the high beams are not switched
on by the system.
General information
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
The driver can intervene at any time and switch
the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating
1.
Depending on the equipment, turn the light
switch into position or .
2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
row.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
The high beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically.
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
Deactivating
The High-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 73. To reactivate the high-beam
Assistant, press the button on the turn signal
lever.
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
ually switch off the high beams in situations
where required to avoid a safety risk.
The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Fog lights
Front fog lights
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on.
Press button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
page 99, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front
fog lights.
Seite 101
Lights Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
Instrument lighting
Settings
The parking lights or low beams
must be switched on to adjust
the brightness.
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lamps, and cour‐
tesy lamps are controlled automatically.
Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐
trols brightness of some of these features.
Overview
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
Switching the interior lights on and off
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Switching the reading lamps on and
off manually
Press button.
Reading lights are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lights.
Ambient light
Depending on the equipment, the lighting can
be individually adjusted in the interior for some
lights.
Selecting color scheme
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
4. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 102
Controls Lights
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and front
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in
which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate restraint.
Side airbag
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Seite 103
Safety Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
impact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot protect as intended or
may cause additional injuries due to triggering.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐
low the information on optimum protective ef‐
fect of the airbag system.◀
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the floor area and does not support
them on the dashboard.
▷ There should be no additional persons, an‐
imals or objects between an airbag and a
person.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
modify them in any way.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, for instance
for GPS devices or mobile phones.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; therefore,
contact BMW Customer Relations or your au‐
thorized BMW service center.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Safety information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
nents.◀
Seite 104
Controls Safety
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in‐
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐
spective accident severity. There is a risk of
injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐
tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐
ped by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Correct function
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the operational readiness of the entire airbag
system and the belt tensioner.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
ignition is turned on.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat passenger airbags
Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
Safety information
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
bag function, the system must be able to de‐
tect whether a person is sitting in the front
passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area
must be used for this purpose. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the
front passenger keeps his or her feet in the
floor area.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger
seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Seite 105
Safety Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags indicates the operating state of the
front-seat passenger airbags.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system or when the seat
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient
size is detected on the seat. The airbags
on the front passenger side are activated.
Detected child seats
The system generally detects children seated
in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐
quired by NHTSA at the point in time when the
vehicle was manufactured. After installing a
child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp
for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up.
This indicates that the child seat has been de‐
tected and the front-seat passenger airbags
are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front passenger's airbags very much depends
on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐
er's seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon
as a respective message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display.
1.
Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat
still moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
if there is a significant loss of pressure in one
or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the
tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure
and tire temperature.
Seite 106
Controls Safety
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
General information
With use of the system observe further infor‐
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
fer to page 200.
Functional requirements
The system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is
not assured.
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Status display
The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play, for example, whether or not the TPM is
active.
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"
The status is displayed.
Status control display
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a SMS text message
on the Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning based
on the tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset.
One wheel is yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire.
All wheels are yellow
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires.
Wheels, gray
The system cannot detect a flat tire due to a
malfunction.
Status information
The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐
pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
shows the actual values read; they may vary
depending on driving style or weather condi‐
tions.
Reset the system
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
On the Control Display and on the vehicle:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the sta‐
tus is displayed.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically while driving.
The progress of the reset is displayed.
After a successfully completed Reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
active" is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
Seite 107
Safety Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Messages
Required tire inflation pressure check
message
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
System will issue a warning related to the
tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset.
▷ Inflation was not carried out according to
specifications.
A Check Control message is displayed.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last reset.
In these cases:
1.
Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Reset the system.
Message in case of low tire pressure
The yellow warning lamp lights up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
System will issue a warning related to the
tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset.
In these cases:
1.
Reduce your speed and drive moderately.
Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, e.g., gas station,
check and correct the tire inflation pres‐
sure in all four tires, if necessary.
3. Reset the system.
Message in case of sharp tire inflation
pressure loss
The yellow warning lamp lights up.
In addition, a symbol with the affected
tires will be displayed in the Check
Control message.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐
flation pressure.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
The system issues a warning based on the
tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset.
In these cases:
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 208, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires.
Follow the information on run-flat tires and
continued driving with these tires.◀
A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC
Dynamic Stability Control.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Seite 108
Controls Safety
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Check the air pressure in all four tires, e.g.,
using the tire pressure gage of a tire repair
kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been initialized. In this case, initi‐
alize the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a tire repair kit
or by changing the tire.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
this case, have the electronics checked at the
next opportunity and have them replaced, if
needed.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been reset. In this case, perform
the reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance with a flat tire
depends on cargo load, driving style and road
conditions.
A vehicle with an average load has a possible
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
braking, a longer braking distance and different
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently when a
run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
reduced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
System limits
The system does not function properly if a re‐
set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is
reported though tire inflation pressures are
correct.
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the
sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus
increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire
inflation pressure is reduced when the tire
temperature falls again. These circumstances
Seite 109
Safety Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
may cause a warning when temperatures fall
very sharply.
The system cannot indicate sudden serious
tire damage caused by external circumstances.
Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. No flat
tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐
tected.
Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: Have system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
Seite 110
Controls Safety
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
the corresponding wheel changes. This will be
detected and reported as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, for exam‐
ple, whether or not the FTM is active.
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
The status is displayed.
Initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation pres‐
sures serve as reference values in order to de‐
tect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
On the Control Display:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
inflation pressure.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 208, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires.
Follow the information on run-flat tires and
continued driving with these tires.◀
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on, if needed.
System limits
A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
nal circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐
vance.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Seite 111
Safety Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
Check the air pressure in all four tires, e.g.,
using the tire pressure gage of a tire repair
kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
2.
Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a tire repair kit
or by changing the tire.
Run-flat tires
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance with a flat tire
depends on cargo load, driving style and road
conditions.
A vehicle with an average load has a possible
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
braking, a longer braking distance and different
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently when a
run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
reduced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system. Depending on
how the vehicle is equipped, Intelligent Safety
consists of one or more systems that can help
prevent an imminent collision.
▷ City light braking function warning, refer to
page 113.
Seite 112
Controls Safety
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 119.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to
page 122.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 124.
Safety information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Front-end collision warning
Depending on the equipment, the collision
warning system consists of one of the two sys‐
tems:
▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐
ing function, refer to page 113.
▷ Front-end collision warning with braking
function, refer to page 116
Approach control warning
with City light braking
function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
Seite 113
Safety Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
A camera in the area of the rearview mirror
controls the system.
The approach control warning is available even
if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tem reactions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
Objects are responded to if they are detected
by the system.
Safety information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Seite 114
Controls Safety
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via iDrive.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired time on the Control
Display.
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Prerequisite for the brake
booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
on the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is a risk of a
Seite 115
Safety Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g., by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Observe
the limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.
▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment
version, the field of view of the camera in
the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐
scured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e.g., from the sun
low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
such as the warning time, the more warnings
are displayed. However, there may also be an
excess of false warnings.
Collision warning with
braking function
The concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently if needed.
The automatic braking intervention may be
executed with maximum braking force and for
a brief period only as necessary.
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
Control with Stop&Go, the front-end collision
warning is controlled via the cruise control ra‐
dar sensor in conjunction with a camera.
The front-end collision warning is available
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the collision warning and braking
Seite 116
Controls Safety
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
are delayed in order to avoid false system re‐
actions.
General information
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible danger of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of
warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐
uation.
Detection range
Objects are responded to if they are detected
by the system.
Safety information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Radar sensor
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of
the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Seite 117
Safety Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via iDrive.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired time on the Control
Display.
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by an automatic braking intervention
in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
automatic braking intervention if there is risk of
Seite 118
Controls Safety
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
a collision. The intervention can bring the vehi‐
cle to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g. by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol.
Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the braking
intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.
No automatic delay occurs.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.
▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment
version, the field of view of the camera in
the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐
scured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e.g., from the sun
low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
such as the warning time, the more warnings
are displayed. However, there may also be an
excess of false warnings.
Pedestrian warning with
Approach control
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐
sue a warning if there is imminent danger of a
collision with pedestrians and includes a brak‐
ing function.
The camera in the area of the rearview mirror
controls the system.
General information
With sufficient brightness, the system warns
about possible collision danger with pedes‐
trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking
before a collision.
Seite 119
Safety Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Under those circumstances it reacts to people
who are within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Safety information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
Seite 120
Controls Safety
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Prerequisite for the brake
booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
on the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is a risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, e.g., by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Observe
the limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield are dirty or covered.
Seite 121
Safety Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e.g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Lane departure warning
Concept
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane
markings is about to leave the lane. This
speed, depending on the country version, is
between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
the event of warnings. The time of the warning
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
uation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release the driver
from the personal responsibility to correctly
assess route and traffic situation. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the driving style to
the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and
actively intervene in the respective situations.
In the event of a warning, do not unnecessarily
jerk the steering wheel.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The lane departure warning is automatically
activated after departure, if the function was
switched on the last time the engine was stop‐
ped.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
Seite 122
Controls Safety
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be
issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Seite 123
Safety Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Active Blind Spot Detection
The concept
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind and next to the vehicle at
speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐
med.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes
and the steering wheel vibrates.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The Active Blind Spot Detection is automati‐
cally activated after departure, if the function
was switched on the last time the engine was
stopped.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective set‐
tings.
Seite 124
Controls Safety
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Display
Lamp in the exterior mirror housing
Prewarning
The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous‐
ing indicates when there are vehicles in the
blind spot or approaching from behind.
Acute warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the lamp in the exterior mirror housing
flashes brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.
Brief flashing
A brief flashing of the lamp during vehicle un‐
locking serves as system self-test.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
Seite 125
Safety Controls
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Brake force display
Concept
Additional brake lamps indicate emergency
braking to the traffic behind. This can reduce
the risk of a rear-end collision.
General information
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lights additionally light up.
Seite 126
Controls Safety
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
ing engine speed and by applying brakes to
the individual wheels.
General information
Dynamic Stability Control detects, e.g., the fol‐
lowing unstable driving conditions:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 128, is a version of the DSC where for‐
ward momentum is optimized.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
When driving with roof load, e.g., with
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
to the elevated center of gravity. There is a risk
of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC
when driving with roof load.◀
Seite 127
Driving stability control systems Controls
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF button
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.
DSC is switched off.
The steering and, depending on the equip‐
ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go
out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
Concept
DTC is a version of the DSC where forward
momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum headway on
special road conditions or loose road surfaces,
e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐
what limited driving stability.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Therefore, drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose ground.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating DTC
Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up.
Seite 128
Controls Driving stability control systems
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Deactivating DTC
Press button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
tor lamp go out.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of
the vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, with a corre‐
spondingly sporty driving style, wheels are
braked individually. The resulting braking
power is simultaneously largely compensated
by an engine intervention.
xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
axles as demanded by the driving situation and
road surface.
Display on the Control Display
Displaying xDrive view
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "xDrive status"
The following information is displayed:
▷ With a navigation system: compass display
for the driving direction
▷ Pitch attitude with degree and percentage.
▷ Transverse gradient with degree indica‐
tion.
▷ Graphic display for the steering.
HDC Hill Descent Control
Concept
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐
matically controls vehicle speed on steep
downhill gradients. Without applying the
brakes, the vehicle moves at slightly more than
walking speed. It the brakes are actively ap‐
plied, the system distributes force according to
the traction.
Vehicle stability and maneuverability are im‐
proved on downhill gradients.
Hill Descent Control can be activated at
speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
driving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed
and then keeps its speed constant.
Only use HDC in low gears or in selector lever
position D or R.
Increasing or decreasing vehicle
speed
Specify desired speed in the range from ap‐
prox. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h
using the rocker switch of the cruise control on
the steering wheel. Vehicle speed can be
changed by lightly accelerating.
▷ Press the rocker switch up to the point of
resistance: the speed increases gradually.
▷ Press up the rocker switch past the point
of resistance: the speed increases while
the rocker switch is pressed.
▷ Press the rocker switch down to the point
of resistance: the speed decreases gradu‐
ally.
Seite 129
Driving stability control systems Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ Press the rocker switch down past the
point of resistance: when driving forward,
the speed decreases to approx.
6 mph/10 km/h; when reversing, the speed
decreases to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h.
Activating HDC
Press button; the LED above the button
lights up.
Deactivating HDC
Press button again. The LED goes out.
HDC is automatically deactivated above
approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
Display in the instrument cluster
The selected speed is displayed
in the speedometer.
▷ Green: the system is actively
braking the vehicle.
▷ Orange: the system is on
standby.
Malfunction
A message is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated
brake temperatures.
Dynamic Damping Control
Concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
This enhances the driving dynamics and driv‐
ing comfort depending on the road surface
condition and driving style.
Programs
The system offers several different programs.
The programs can be selected via Driving Dy‐
namics Control.
SPORT
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility.
SPORT+
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility when driving
with limited driving stabilization.
COMFORT/ECO PRO
Balanced control of the vehicle.
Variable sport steering
The variable sport steering increases the
steering angle of the front wheels at large
steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or
when parking. Steering becomes more direct.
It also varies the force required to turn the
wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed.
This results in a sporty steering response. In
addition, it becomes easier to steer during
parking and maneuvering.
Seite 130
Controls Driving stability control systems
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Servotronic
Concept
The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐
quired to turn the wheels in accordance with
the vehicle speed. At low speeds, the steering
force is strongly supported, i. e. during steer‐
ing, low force is required. As the speed in‐
creases, the assistance of the steering force is
reduced.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐
ing to the driving program, so that a direct,
sporty feel and/or comfortable steering is con‐
veyed.
Driving Dynamics Control
Concept
The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine-
tune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐
ous programs can be selected for this purpose.
The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC
OFF buttons can each be used to activate a
program.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Operating the programs
Button Program
DSC OFF
TRACTION
SPORT+
SPORT
COMFORT
ECO PRO
Automatic program change
The system may automatically switch to COM‐
FORT in the following situations:
▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control.
▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐
TION or DSC OFF mode.
DSC OFF
When DSC OFF, refer to page 128, is active,
driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in curves.
TRACTION
When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has
maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 128, is
activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐
celeration and when driving in curves.
SPORT+
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus‐
pension and adjusted drivetrain with limited
driving stabilization.
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
The driver handles several of the stabilization
tasks.
Seite 131
Driving stability control systems Controls
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Activating SPORT+
Press button repeatedly until SPORT+
appears in the instrument cluster and
the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.
Automatic program change
When activating cruise control, the program
automatically switches to SPORT mode.
Indicator/warning lights
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:
Dynamic Traction Control is activated.
SPORT
Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension
and drivetrain for greater driving agility with
maximum driving stabilization.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications. The configuration is stored for
the profile currently used.
Activating SPORT
Press button repeatedly until SPORT
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring SPORT
When the display is activated on the Control
Display, refer to page 133, the SPORT driving
mode can be set to individual specifications.
▷ Activate SPORT.
▷ "Configure SPORT"
▷ Configure the SPORT driving mode.
SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
vated:
1.
"Settings"
2. "SPORT mode"
3. Configure driving mode.
This configuration is retrieved when the
SPORT driving mode is activated.
COMFORT
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving
stabilization.
Activating COMFORT
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 131.
ECO PRO
ECO PRO, refer to page 188, provides consis‐
tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for
maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐
zation.
Comfort functions and the engine controller
are adjusted.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
1.
Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
Make the desired settings.
Configuring driving program
Settings can be made for the following driving
programs in Driving mode:
▷ SPORT, refer to page 132.
▷ ECO PRO, refer to page 189.
Seite 132
Controls Driving stability control systems
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Displays
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a
list of the selectable programs.
Depending on your vehicle's op‐
tional features, the list in the in‐
strument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Selected program
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.
Display on the Control Display
Program changes can be displayed on the
Control Display.
1.
"Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Driving mode info"
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on inclines.
The parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off assistant
1.
Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Seite 133
Driving stability control systems Controls
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Active Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function, ACC
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed on
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle ac‐
celerates or brakes automatically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of your vehicle within the
given system limits so that the set distance to
the vehicle ahead is maintained.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec‐
tive speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐
riod, the system is able to detect this within the
given system limits.
General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
WARNING
Risk of accident due to too high speed
differences to other vehicles, e.g., in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
vehicle.
▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own
lane.
Seite 134
Controls Driving comfort
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene in
the respective situations.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press but‐
ton
Function
Cruise control on/off, interrupt,
refer to page 135
Store, maintain speed, refer to
page 136
Call up speed, continue cruise
control, refer to page 137
Reduce distance, refer to
page 137
Increase distance, refer to
page 137
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to page 136
Radar sensor
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the
vehicle.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior mirror clean and clear.
A dirty or covered area in front of the interior
mirror may hinder the detection of vehicles.
If necessary, clean the area in front of the inte‐
rior mirror, for example, carefully remove salt
residue in the winter.
Functional requirements
Speed range
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h. The maximum speed that
can be set depends on the vehicle.
The system can also be activated when sta‐
tionary.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
DSC will be switched on, if needed.
Seite 135
Driving comfort Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Switching off
To switch off the system while standing, step
on brake pedal at the same time.
Press button on the steering wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting manually
Press button on the steering wheel.
If interrupting the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Automatic interruption
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
opened while the vehicle is standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for
an extended period, for example, on a road
with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐
rupted, for example, by dirt or heavy fog.
▷ After a longer stationary period when the
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the
system.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐
eter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer
to page 137.
DSC will be switched on, if needed.
The speed can also be stored by
pressing a button.
Press button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
Seite 136
Controls Driving comfort
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Adjusting distance
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐
its, braking can be late. There is a risk of acci‐
dents or risk of property damage. Be aware to
the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the dis‐
tance to the traffic and weather conditions and
maintain the prescribed safety distance, possi‐
bly by braking.◀
Reduce distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 137.
Increase distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 137.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up stored speed and distance
Press button with the system
switched on.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Desired speed and stored speed
▷ Marking lights up green:
system is active, the mark‐
ing indicates the desired
speed.
▷ Marking lights up orange:
system is interrupted, the
marking indicates the stored
speed.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you
is shown.
Seite 137
Driving comfort Controls
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Distance display
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set automatically after
the system is switched on.
The system has been interrupted or
distance control is temporarily sup‐
pressed because the accelerator
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle
was not detected.
Distance control is temporarily sup‐
pressed because the accelerator
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle
was detected.
Detected vehicle
Symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven
away.
ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti‐
vate ACC by briefly stepping on the accelera‐
tor pedal, pressing the RES button or rocker
switch.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for
the system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Symbol flashes red and a signal
sounds:
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneuver.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
Distance information
The symbol is displayed when the dis‐
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead
is too short.
The distance information is active under the
following circumstances:
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected,
refer to page 96.
▷ Distance too short.
▷ Speed greater than approx.
40 mph/70 km/h.
System limits
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not
be detected.
Seite 138
Controls Driving comfort
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Deceleration
The system also does not decelerate in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving
road users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐
hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,
the system requests that the driver intervene
by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐
vers, if needed.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
In tight curves the system offers only restricted
detection where a vehicle ahead of you might
be detected late or not at all.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐
ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐
ating.
After releasing the accelerator pedal the sys‐
tem is reactivated and controls speed inde‐
pendently.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep inclines.
▷ From bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Seite 139
Driving comfort Controls
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Weather
In the event of unfavorable weather and light
conditions, e.g., if there is rain, snowfall, slush,
fog or glare, this may result in poorer recogni‐
tion of vehicles as well as short-term interrup‐
tions for vehicles that are already detected.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, e.g.,
by braking, steering or evading.
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be
caused by damage incurred, e.g., during park‐
ing.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
The function for detecting and responding
when approaching stationary vehicles may be
limited in the following situations:
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A
Check Control message is displayed.
Cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically
as needed.
General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
on a loose road surface.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of property
damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, interrupting,
refer to page 141.
Store speed, refer to page 141.
Seite 140
Controls Driving comfort
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Button Function
Resume speed, continue cruise con‐
trol, refer to page 142.
Rocker switch: adjust speed, refer to
page 141.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
DSC will be switched on, if needed.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
rent speed.
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐
vated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ If HDC is activated.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐
eter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer
to page 142.
DSC will be switched on, if needed.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
Press button.
Seite 141
Driving comfort Controls
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up stored speed
Press button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is reached again and main‐
tained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator lamp
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
tem is switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed
▷ Marking lights up green:
system is active, the mark‐
ing indicates the desired
speed.
▷ Marking lights up orange:
system is interrupted, the
marking indicates the stored
speed.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
Brief status display
Selected desired speed.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
Seite 142
Controls Driving comfort
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
System limits
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient.
PDC Park Distance Control
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. When you
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐
ble - then the object is reported through:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐
tances are located in the bumpers.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐
ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from
the object.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at a distance to
the object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐
vated, the warning can be delayed due to
physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury
or risk of property damage. Avoid approaching
an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while
PDC is not yet active.◀
Overview
With front PDC: button in vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
e.g., in the bumpers.
Functional requirements
To ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers,
bicycle racks.
▷ Keep sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged
when the engine is running.
Seite 143
Driving comfort Controls
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
The rearview camera also switches on.
▷ If equipped with front PDC: when obsta‐
cles are detected behind or in front of the
vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower
than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.
You may turn off automatic activation for de‐
tected obstacles:
1. "Settings"
2. "Parking"
3. Select setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
tion on obstacle detection, e.g., in vehicle
washes, to reduce false alarms.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
With front PDC: switching on/off
manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
WARNING
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E.g.,
if an object is detected to the left rear of the
vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
With front PDC: if objects are located both in
front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating
continuous signal is sounded.
The signal tone is switched off, when selector
lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
Steptronic transmission.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
1.
"Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. "PDC"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
6. Press the controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display. Objects that
are farther away are already displayed on the
Control Display before a signal sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
"Rear view camera"
Seite 144
Controls Driving comfort
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.,
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g., from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs,
can move into the blind area of the sensors
before or after a continuous tone sounds.
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no ob‐
stacle within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
rages.
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
tion on obstacle detection, e.g., in vehicle
washes, to reduce false alarms.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
area on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
Surround View
Concept
Surround View comprises various camera as‐
sistance systems that help the driver when
parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits
and intersections.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 146
▷ Top View, refer to page 148.
▷ Side View, refer to page 150.
Seite 145
Driving comfort Controls
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively intervene in the respective
situations.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
necessary, clean the camera lens.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Switching the view via iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Seite 146
Controls Driving comfort
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems
and trailers that are not connected to a
trailer power socket can lead to malfunc‐
tions.
Activating assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Pathway lines
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐
age of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Obstacle marking
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by
the PDC sensors and, when respectively
equipped, detected by the rearview camera.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC.
Seite 147
Driving comfort Controls
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Assistance functions also take into account
data of the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti‐
mate the distance from the objects on the dis‐
play.
Top View
Concept
Top View provides assistance in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is
shown on the Control Display.
General information
The image is captured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors, by the rear‐
view camera and a camera on the front of the
vehicle.
The range is no more than approx. 6.5 ft/2 m to
the side, front and rear.
Obstacles within this range are thus displayed
early on the Control Display.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively intervene in the respective
situations.◀
Seite 148
Controls Driving comfort
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Cameras
Front camera
Rearview camera
Cameras at the bottom in the mirror housings.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the camera lenses if necessary.
Functional requirements
Top View can be used only to a limited extent
in the following situations:
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the tailgate open.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷ In poor light.
The unavailable camera range is depicted by
shading.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running.
The rearview camera image is displayed. To
switch to the Top View:
"Rear view camera"
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
Seite 149
Driving comfort Controls
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Top View is displayed.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Display
Display on the Control Display
The area surrounding the vehicle can be dis‐
played on the Control Display.
The display appears as soon as Top View is
activated.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, it is possible to switch to top view:
"Rear view camera"
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Displaying the turning radius and
pathway lines
▷ The static, red turning radius line shows
the space needed to the side of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists
you in assessing the amount of space ac‐
tually needed to the side of the vehicle.
The lane line depends on the engaged
gear and the current steering angle. The
track line is continuously adjusted for the
steering wheel movement.
"Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits
A Check Control message is displayed when a
camera is not working.
Side View
Concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road
users concealed by obstacles to the left and
right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐
tively late from the driver's seat. To improve
the viewing, each camera, front and rear on the
vehicle, detects the traffic area on the side.
Which camera is active is shown on the top
edge of the screen.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively intervene in the respective
situations.◀
Seite 150
Controls Driving comfort
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Side View
Cameras
Front camera
Rear camera
Two cameras are used for the detection.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 245.
Switching on/off
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
Depending on the transmission position, the
picture of the front or rear camera is displayed.
Switching off automatically
By switching into a different function or when
changing gears.
Front Side View: when a certain driving dis‐
tance or speed is exceeded.
Display
General information
The traffic area in front of or behind the vehicle
is displayed on the Control Display.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
Warning of crossing traffic
Concept
When an object approaching from the side is
detected by the front or rear camera, this is de‐
picted by a symbol in the Side View display.
Requirements
▷ Side View switched on.
Seite 151
Driving comfort Controls
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ Your vehicle moves no faster than walking
speed.
▷ To detect approaching objects, sufficient
brightness, e.g., daylight is necessary.
Display
The yellow symbol is displayed if an
approaching vehicle is detected by the
camera.
A gray symbol is displayed if crossing
traffic cannot be detected.
System limits
In the following situations, the warning about
crossing traffic may be limited:
▷ In poor lighting or visibility conditions.
▷ If the camera is soiled or covered.
System limits
The objects displayed on the Control Display
under certain circumstances are closer than
they appear. Therefore, do not estimate the
distance from the objects on the display.
The viewing angle is approx. 180°.
Parking assistant
Concept
This system assists the driver in parking paral‐
lel to the road.
General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
The parking assistant uses the sensors of PDC
Park Distance Control. Also observe the safety
information for PDC Park Distance Control.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
NOTE
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
Seite 152
Controls Driving comfort
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking
spaces are located on the side of the vehicle.
Functional requirements
Ultrasound sensors
To ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers.
▷ Keep sensors clean and unobstructed.
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
▷ Gaps behind an object that has a min.
length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
3.3 ft/1.0 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking
▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
▷ The parking brake is released.
▷ When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
must be set where applicable.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button
Press park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Seite 153
Driving comfort Controls
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but
not activated.
The system is activated.
Parking space search and system
status
▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side
of the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant
is activated and search for parking space
active.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been taken over by system.
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
Parking
1.
Press park assistance button or shift
into reverse gear to switch the parking as‐
sistant on, refer to page 153. Activate the
parking assistant, if needed.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed
of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a
distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the Control Display, refer to page 154.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
The best possible parking position will
come after gear change on the stationary
vehicle - wait for the automatic steering
wheel move.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ Press park assistance button.
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match
the instruction on the Control Display.
Seite 154
Controls Driving comfort
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly
appear.
▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays
clearances that are too small.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
▷ When switching to another function on the
Control Display.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resuming
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued, if needed.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
page 153, and follow the instructions on the
Control Display.
Switching off
The system can be switched off as follows:
▷ Press park assistance button.
▷ Switching off the ignition.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
tance in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ With ditches or edges, e.g., an edge of a
port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.,
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g., from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
Seite 155
Driving comfort Controls
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs,
can move into the blind area of the sensors
before or after a continuous tone sounds.
Parking spaces that are not suitable may be
detected or suitable parking spaces may not
be detected at all.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.
Seite 156
Controls Driving comfort
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Automatic climate control
1 Vent settings
2 Air flow
3 AUTO program
4 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
clear
5 Recirculated-air mode
6 Temperature
7 Defrosts windows and removes condensa‐
tion
8 Cooling function
9 Rear window defroster
10 Seat heating 54
Seite 157
Climate control Controls
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Set any air volume.
The AUTO program can also be switched on
directly via the AUTO button.
Switching off
Turn the rotary switch for the air volume, refer
to page 159, to 0. The blower and automatic
climate control are turned off entirely.
Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control reaches this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
by increasing the cooling or heating output,
and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Air conditioning
The air in the vehicle's interior will be cooled
and dehumidified and, depending on the tem‐
perature setting, warmed again.
The vehicle's interior can only be cooled with
the engine running.
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 183, devel‐
ops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is
normal.
AUTO program
Press button.
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature and
outside influences, the air is directed to the
windshield, side windows, upper body, and
into the floor area.
The cooling function, refer to page 158, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
Recirculated-air mode
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environ‐
mental conditions.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the vehicle's interior deteriorates and
the fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if
needed.
Seite 158
Controls Climate control
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Air flow, manual
Turn the ring to set the desired
air flow.
The higher the rate, the more ef‐
fective the heating or cooling
will be.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Manual air distribution
Press buttons repeatedly to select a program:
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Floor area.
You may combine these programs as needed.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function to dehumidify
the air.
Rear window defroster
Press button.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
This filter should be replaced during scheduled
maintenance, refer to page 225, of your vehi‐
cle.
Seite 159
Climate control Controls
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Temperature, left
2 AUTO program
3 Display
4 Remove ice and condensation
5 Air flow
6 Display
7 Air distribution settings
8 Maximum cooling
9 Temperature, right
10 Seat heating, right 54
11 Recirculated-air mode
12 SYNC program
13 Air conditioning
14 Rear window defroster
15 Seat heating, left 54
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except:
▷ SYNC program.
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of Air volume button.
▷ Seat heating.
Switching off
Press and hold the left button until the
control switches off.
Temperature
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The automatic climate control reaches this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed,
Seite 160
Controls Climate control
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
by increasing the cooling or heating output,
and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Air conditioning
The air in the vehicle's interior will be cooled
and dehumidified and, depending on the tem‐
perature setting, warmed again.
The vehicle's interior can only be cooled with
the engine running.
Press button.
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 183, devel‐
ops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is
normal.
Maximum cooling
Press button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, optimum air flow and recirculated-air
mode.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The function is available above an external
temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ And with the
engine running.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
AUTO program
Press button.
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature, the
intensity of the AUTO program, and outside in‐
fluences, the air is directed to the windshield,
side windows, upper body, and into the floor
area.
The cooling function, refer to page 161, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribution.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
outside air and shuts off automatically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked.
Seite 161
Climate control Controls
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Recirculated-air mode switches off automati‐
cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐
tain amount of time in order to avoid window
fogging.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the vehicle's interior deteriorates and
the fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
Air flow, manual
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Manual air distribution
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and floor area.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
▷ Windows: driver's side only.
▷ Windows and upper body region.
If the windows are fogged over, press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
SYNC program
Press button.
The current setting of the temperature on the
driver's side is transferred to the front passen‐
ger side.
The program is switched off if the setting on
the front passenger side is changed.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press button.
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows.
For this purpose, point the side vents towards
the side windows as needed.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the cooling function or press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Rear window defroster
Press button.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
This filter should be replaced during vehicle
maintenance, refer to page 225.
Seite 162
Controls Climate control
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 2.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐
perature in the upper body region, arrow 3.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the set interior tem‐
perature for the driver and front passenger.
Adjusting the ventilation
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's
interior is too hot.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Ventilation in the rear
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐
perature, arrow 2.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the adjusted interior
temperature.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 3.
Parked-vehicle ventilation
Concept
The parked-vehicle ventilation ventilates the
vehicle interior and lowers its temperature, if
needed.
General information
The parked-vehicle ventilation system is oper‐
ated via iDrive.
Functional requirements
Parked-car ventilation
▷ Using the preset activation time or when
operated directly: any external tempera‐
ture.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the
vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus,
Seite 163
Climate control Controls
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
limit the maximum activation time to save
the vehicle battery. The system will be
available again after engine starting and/or
a short trip.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
The system continues to run for some time af‐
ter being switched off.
Preselecting the switch-on time
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the activation time
On the Control Display:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐
vated.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
Seite 164
Controls Climate control
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Universal Integrated Remote
Control
Concept
The Universal Integrated Remote Control can
operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled
systems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The Universal Integrated Remote
Control replaces up to 3 different hand-held
transmitters. To operate the remote control,
the buttons on the interior mirror must be pro‐
grammed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular system
is required in order to program the remote con‐
trol.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐
rage door, using the integrated universal re‐
mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐
tem to be controlled, the system is
generally compatible with the Universal
Integrated Remote Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Control elements on the interior mirror
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the left and right button on
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
Seite 165
Interior equipment Controls
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
proximately 20 seconds until the LED on
the interior mirror flashes. This erases all
programming of the buttons on the interior
mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐
ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of
the interior mirror. The required distance
depends on the hand-held transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be program‐
med on the interior mirror. The LED on the
interior mirror will begin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐
rior mirror has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐
tween the interior mirror and the hand-held
transmitter and repeat the step. Several
more attempts at different distances may
be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐
tween attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐
rior mirror buttons.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the
system to be controlled features a rolling code
radio system.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior mirror
longer. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for
2 seconds, the system features a rolling code
radio system. Flashing and continuous illumi‐
nation of the LED will repeat for approximately
20 seconds.
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
the universal remote control and the system
also have to be synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
Synchronizing the universal remote control
with the system:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
step up to three times in order to finish
synchronization. Once synchronization is
complete, the programmed function will be
carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from
the buttons of the interior mirror. The re‐
quired distance depends on the hand-held
transmitter.
Seite 166
Controls Interior equipment
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The
LED flashing faster indicates that the but‐
ton on the interior mirror has been pro‐
grammed. The system can then be con‐
trolled by the button on the interior mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
Operation
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐
rage door, using the integrated universal re‐
mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior mirror
while the engine is running or when the ignition
is started. To do this, hold down the button
within receiving range of the system until the
function is activated. The interior mirror LED
stays lit while the wireless signal is being
transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the left and right button on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐
mately 20 seconds until the LED flashes rap‐
idly. All stored functions will be deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding out
1. Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to
the side.
3. Move it back to the desired position.
Folding up
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun
visor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Ashtray
Opening
Slide the cover forward.
The ashtray can be inserted in the cup holder.
Seite 167
Interior equipment Controls
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Lighter
WARNING
Contact with hot heating elements or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is a risk of fire
and injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter by its
handle. Make sure that children do not use the
cigarette lighter and do not burn themselves,
e.g., by carrying the remote control with you
when exiting the vehicle.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
The cigarette lighter is located in the center
console.
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Sockets
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on.
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Front center console
Slide the cover forward.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Seite 168
Controls Interior equipment
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Center armrest
Remove the cover.
Rear center console
Remove the cover.
In the cargo area
The socket is located on the right side in the
cargo area.
USB interface/AUX-IN port
Concept
Mobile devices with USB port can be con‐
nected to the USB interface.
A mobile audio device, e.g., a MP3 player, can
be connected using the AUX-IN port.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the USB inter‐
face is located in the center console or in the
glove compartment.
USB interface in the glove
compartment
Mobile storage devices with USB port can be
connected to the USB interface in the glove
compartment.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32
and exFAT are the recommended formats.
The following applications are possible:
▷ Exporting and importing profiles, refer to
page 43.
▷ Loading of software updates.
▷ Adding music files to the music collection
and saving the music collection.
USB interface in the center console
In addition to the USB storage devices descri‐
bed above, additional mobile devices with USB
port can be connected to the USB interface in
the center console.
▷ Mobile phones supported by the USB in‐
terface.
The snap-in adapter features a separate
USB port that is automatically connected
when a compatible mobile phone is in‐
serted.
▷ Audio devices with USB port, for example
MP3 player.
This allows further uses:
▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
Seite 169
Interior equipment Controls
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ Playing video films via USB video.
Information about compatible USB devices can
be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
Overview
The USB interface and the AUX-IN port are lo‐
cated in the center armrest.
The USB interface is located in the glove com‐
partment.
Connecting an external device
Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against
mechanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB media
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every device is operable on the
vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high
temperatures; refer to the device owner's
manual.
▷ Due to the many different compression
techniques, proper playback of the media
stored on the USB storage device cannot
be guaranteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB storage device will be
supplied with charging current via the USB
interface if the device supports this.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the
stored data, do not charge a USB storage
device via the onboard socket, when it is
connected to the USB interface.
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device
should be used, settings may be required
on the USB storage device, refer to the de‐
vice owner's manual.
Non- compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ MTP devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lights.
Cargo area
Cargo cover
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
Seite 170
Controls Interior equipment
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
General information
The cargo cover is in two parts.
This can be removed to load bulky luggage.
Removing
Cargo cover in rear window
1. Pull the cargo cover with both hands by the
outer edges towards the rear, arrows 1, to
disengage it from the catches.
2. Push the cargo cover upwards, arrow 2,
and remove it.
Cargo cover in the cargo area
Push the cargo cover upwards, arrow 1, until it
disengages from the catches and then pull it
towards the front, arrow 2.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to reinstall. The
cargo covers must snap audibly into place on
their respective holders.
Enlarging the cargo area
General information
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
40–20–40. The sides and the middle section
can be folded down separately.
Safety information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest and the of the
head restraint is clear prior to folding down.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
WARNING
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
load can be thrown into the vehicle's interior,
e.g., in case of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the backrest engages into the locking af‐
ter folding it back.◀
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
the protective function of the middle safety
belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. If you are using the mid‐
dle safety belt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀
Seite 171
Interior equipment Controls
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Folding down the sides
Reach into the recess and pull forward.
Folding down the middle section
Fold down the center armrest and pull on the
loop.
Ski and snowboard bag
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the cargo area.
Follow the installation and owner's manual in‐
cluded in the protective jacket.
Seite 172
Controls Interior equipment
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
NOTE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 173.
▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 174.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 174.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front
seats.
▷ Net in the front passenger floor area.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
the glove compartment can be thrown into the
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
of an accident or during braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Seite 173
Storage compartments Controls
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
Compartments in the doors
WARNING
Breakable objects, e.g., glass bottles, can
break in the event of an accident. Broken glass
can be scattered in the vehicle's interior. There
is a risk of injury. Do not stow any breakable
objects in the vehicle's interior.◀
Center armrest
Opening
Press button, arrow 1, and fold the center arm‐
rest up, arrow 2.
Connection for an external audio
device
An external audio device, e.g., an MP3 player,
can be connected via the AV-IN connector in
the center armrest.
Cup holders
Safety information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injury in the event of an
accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the
cup holder.◀
Front
In the center console.
Slide the cover forward.
Seite 174
Controls Storage compartments
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Rear
In the center armrest.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
NOTE
With an open cup holder, the center arm‐
rest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk
of property damage. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.◀
Clothes hooks
Safety information
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks
can obstruct the view while driving. There is a
risk of an accident. When suspending clothing
articles from the hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g., clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.◀
General information
The clothes hooks are located in the rear.
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Storage space under cargo floor panel
Fold up the cargo floor panel. The storage
space under the cargo floor panel is subdi‐
vided.
Storage compartment on the right
side
A waterproof storage compartment is available
on the right side of the cargo area.
Multi-function hook
WARNING
Improper use of the multi-function hooks
can lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g., shopping bags,
from the multi-function hooks. Only transport
heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been
appropriately secured.◀
A multi-function hook is located on the left
side trim in the cargo area.
Seite 175
Storage compartments Controls
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Net
Smaller objects can be stored in the net on the
left side of the cargo area.
Left side storage compartment
Pull the handle.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
To secure the cargo, refer to page 185, there
are lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area with
rail
To secure the cargo, refer to page 185, there
are lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Reversible floor panel
The bottom of the cargo floor panel is coated
with a water- and dirt-resistant finish.
Fold the cargo floor panel up, remove and turn
it over.
Cargo net, FlexNet
To secure the cargo, refer to page 185, the
flexible cargo net can also be used.
Seite 176
Controls Storage compartments
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Seite 177
Storage compartments Controls
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐
other (break-in time).
The following instructions will help you to ach‐
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐
trol.
Safety information
WARNING
Due to new parts and components,
safety and driver assistance systems can react
with a delay. There is a risk of an accident. Af‐
ter installing new parts or with a new vehicle,
drive conservatively and intervene early if nec‐
essary. Observe the break-in procedures of
the respective parts and components.◀
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐
formance between brake discs and brake
pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐
riod.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Driving on poor roads
The vehicle combines all-wheel drive with the
advantages of a normal automobile.
NOTE
Objects in unpaved areas, e.g., stones or
branches, can damage the vehicle. There is a
risk of property damage. Do not drive on un‐
paved terrain.◀
For your own safety, for the safety of passen‐
gers and of the vehicle, heed the following
points:
Seite 180
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ Become familiar with the vehicle before
starting a trip; do not take risks while driv‐
ing.
▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface con‐
ditions. The steeper and more uneven the
road surface, the slower the speed should
be.
▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhill
grades: add engine oil and coolant up to
near the MAX mark. Uphill and downhill
grades can be traveled up to no more than
50 %.
▷ On steep downhill grades, use Hill Descent
Control HDC.
Starting out is possible on uphill grades up
to 30 %. The permissible side tilt is 30 %.
▷ Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in
contact with the ground.
The ground clearance is no more than
7.8 inches/20 cm and can vary according
to the vehicle's load.
▷ When wheels continue to spin, depress the
accelerator so that driving stability control
systems can distribute the driving force to
the wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Trac‐
tion Control if available.
After a trip on poor roads
After a trip on poor roads, check wheels and
tires for damage to maintain driving safety.
Clear heavy soiling from the body.
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other
traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
the vehicle interior. There is a risk of injury or
risk of property damage. Do not drive with the
tailgate open.◀
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body,
e.g., caused by the exhaust gas system. If
combustible materials, such as leaves or grass,
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
gas system, these materials can ignite. There
is a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Do
not remove the heat shields installed and never
apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact
with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle
or during parking. Do not touch the hot ex‐
haust system.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
can influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mobile
phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐
erty damage. If possible, in the vehicle's inte‐
rior use only mobile phones with direct con‐
nections to an exterior antenna in order to
exclude mutual interference and deflect the ra‐
diation from the vehicle's interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
Seite 181
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
NOTE
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
transmission. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. When driving through water, do not ex‐
ceed the maximum indicated water level and
the maximum speed for driving through wa‐
ter.◀
When driving through water, observe the fol‐
lowing:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 19.6 inches/50 cm.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Braking safely
Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that
require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
fort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
active mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated
brake discs can emit functional noises. How‐
ever, this has no effect on the performance and
operational reliability of the brake.
Objects in the movement area around
pedals and floor area
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g., for cleaning.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
gently press the brake pedal every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other traffic.
The heat generated during braking dries brake
discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk
of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress
on the brake system.◀
WARNING
In idle state or with the engine switched
off, safety-relevant functions, e.g., engine
braking effect, braking force boost and steer‐
ing assistance, are restricted or not available at
all. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive
in idle state or with the engine switched off.◀
Seite 182
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking effort. Other‐
wise, the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if needed.
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are increased by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally this cannot be corrected.
Condensation water under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops and collects un‐
derneath the vehicle.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty. The
vehicle is not designed for motorsports com‐
petitive use.
Seite 183
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Loading
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Safety information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them, and cause a sudden drop in tire
inflation pressure. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Pay attention to the permitted load ca‐
pacity of the tires and never exceed the per‐
mitted gross weight.◀
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the vehicle's interior, e.g., in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.◀
NOTE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is a risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀
Determining the load limit
1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the vehicle
and unstable driving situations may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
YYY pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
E.g., if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs
and there will be four 150 lbs passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs:
1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
Seite 184
Driving tips Loading
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with
ratchet straps or with a cargo net or draw
straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area
for securing cargo.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo
nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area with rails
To secure the cargo there are four movable
lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Seite 185
Loading Driving tips
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
To slide the lashing eyes, press the button, ar‐
row 1. Make sure that the lashing eyes latch at
the new position.
The lashing eyes at the openings in the rails
can be removed.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo
nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Cargo net, FlexNet
The flexible cargo net is hooked into eyes and
secures the cargo in the cargo area. The stor‐
age net can be attached to the following eyes:
▷ Lashing eyes in the rails.
▷ Eyes on the cargo area wall.
The eyes are located on both sides of the
cargo area.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
General information
Installation only possible with roof rack.
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Attachment to the rack
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Mounting
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., using
ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐
tly.
Seite 186
Driving tips Loading
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies
for the reduction of fuel consumption and
emission values.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐
erate driving style and regular maintenance,
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove roof-mounted luggage racks which
are no longer required following use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
thereby reduces the range.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
sumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away immediately
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold
engine up to operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Seite 187
Saving fuel Driving tips
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Avoid high engine speeds
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐
ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐
gine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐
stant speed.
If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator of
the vehicle, refer to page 90.
Use coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle au‐
tomatically switches off the engine during a
stop.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐
onds of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style,
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
The ECO PRO driving program supports the
energy conserving use of comfort features.
These functions are automatically deactivated
partially or completely.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach‐
ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
BMW recommends that maintenance work be
performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance
System, refer to page 225.
ECO PRO
Concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
gine control and comfort features, e.g., the cli‐
mate control output, are adjusted.
Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
matically decoupled from the transmission in
the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐
tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position
D remains engaged.
Seite 188
Driving tips Saving fuel
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are
displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐
sumption driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
General information
The system includes the following
EfficientDynamics functions and displays:
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 190.
▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to
page 190.
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to
page 189.
▷ ECO PRO coasting driving condition, refer
to page 191.
Overview
Driving Dynamics Control
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1.
Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
Via iDrive
1. "Settings"
2. "ECO PRO mode"
With respective equipment:
1. "Settings"
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure ECO PRO"
ECO PRO limit
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed
of the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
▷ "Tip at:":
Set the desired ECO PRO speed.
ECO PRO climate control
To activate ECO PRO climate control:
"ECO PRO climate control"
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or
cooling of the vehicle's interior, fuel consump‐
tion can be economized.
The mirror heating is made available when out‐
side temperatures are very cold.
Coasting
To activate coasting:
"Coasting"
Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
ing the engine and coasting with the engine
idling.
This function is only available in ECO PRO
mode.
Deactivate the function to use the braking ef‐
fect of the engine when traveling downhill.
ECO PRO potential savings
Shows potential savings with the current set‐
tings in percentages.
Seite 189
Saving fuel Driving tips
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Display in the instrument cluster
ECO PRO bonus range
An adjusted driving style helps
you extend your driving range.
This may be displayed as the
bonus range in the instrument
cluster.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled.
ECO PRO efficiency display
Display in the instrument cluster
Display in the instrument cluster with extended
range
A mark in the efficiency display informs about
the current driving style.
Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐
ergy recovered by coasting or when braking.
Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐
celerating.
Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the
bar's color:
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long
as the mark moves within the blue range.
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e.g., by
backing off the accelerator pedal.
The display switches to blue as soon as all
conditions for driving with optimized fuel effi‐
ciency.
ECO PRO tip, driving tip
The arrow indicates that the driving
style can be adjusted to be more fuel
efficient, e.g., by backing off the accel‐
erator.
Activating the driving style indicator
and ECO PRO tips
The efficiency display and ECO PRO tips in the
instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO
display is activated.
To activate the indicator:
1.
"Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "ECO PRO Info"
ECO PRO tip, symbols
An additional symbol and text instructions are
displayed.
Symbol Measure
For efficient driving back off the ac‐
celerator or delay accelerating to al‐
low time to assess road conditions.
Reduce speed to the selected ECO
PRO speed.
Steptronic transmission: shift from
M/S to D.
Seite 190
Driving tips Saving fuel
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Indications on the Control Display
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
ogy can be displayed while driving.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
Displaying fuel consumption history
The average fuel consumption can be dis‐
played within an adjustable time frame.
Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐
lected time frame.
Trip interruptions are represented below the
bar on the time axis.
"Consumption history"
Adjusting the fuel consumption
history time frame
1.
Select the symbol.
2. Adjust the time frame.
Resetting fuel consumption history
1.
Open "Options".
2. "Reset consumption history"
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
The current efficiency can be displayed.
"EfficientDynamics info"
The following systems are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Climate control output.
▷ Coasting.
Display ECO PRO tips
"ECO PRO tips"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Coasting
Concept
The function helps to conserve fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when selector lever position D is set. The
vehicle continues traveling with the engine
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector
lever position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coast‐
ing.
As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐
tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled
again.
General information
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐
ing mode.
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control.
The function is available in a certain speed
range.
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
the function as often as possible and supports
the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
Functional requirements
In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in
a speed range from approximately
30 mph/50 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h if the
following conditions are met:
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
operated.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
Seite 191
Saving fuel Driving tips
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Operation via shift paddles
Concept
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
coasting mode can be influenced with the shift
paddles.
Activating, deactivating coasting via shift
paddles
1. Using the shift paddle + shift to the highest
gear.
2. Press shift paddle + again to enter coasting
mode.
To deactivate, press shift paddle - .
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
The mark in the efficiency display is backlit in
blue and is located at the zero point. The tach‐
ometer approximately indicates idle speed.
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
the zero point during coasting.
Display in the instrument cluster with
extended range
The mark in the efficiency dis‐
play below the tachometer is
backlit in blue and is located at
the zero point. The tachometer
approximately indicates idle
speed.
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
the zero point during coasting.
Indications on the Control Display
The coasting driving condition is displayed in
EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode
is active.
Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:
driving condition coasting.
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
3. "EfficientDynamics info"
Deactivating the function manually
The function can be deactivated in the Config‐
ure ECO PRO menu, e.g., to use the braking
effect of the engine when traveling downhill.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
System limits
The function is not available if one of the fol‐
lowing conditions applies:
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
▷ If cruise control is activated.
▷ If driving in the dynamic limit range.
▷ If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ If the battery charge state is temporarily
too low.
▷ If the vehicle electrical system is drawing
excessive current.
Seite 192
Driving tips Saving fuel
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Seite 193
Saving fuel Driving tips
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
General information
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 198, prior to refueling.
Safety information
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of property
damage. Refuel promptly.◀
Fuel cap
Opening
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1.
Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
Seite 196
Mobility Refueling
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors
can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Pay attention that the retain‐
ing strap is not jammed or crushed when clos‐
ing the lid.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Observe the following when
refueling
General information
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Safety information
NOTE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by
contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the
environment. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Avoid overfilling.◀
Seite 197
Refueling Mobility
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in
winter, e.g., helps make a cold start easier.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
tent.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should satisfy the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Safety information
NOTE
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the
catalytic converter is permanently damaged.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not re‐
fuel or add the following in the case of gasoline
engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, e.g., manganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
NOTE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not use a fuel with a higher etha‐
nol percentage than recommended or one with
other types of alcohol, e.g., M5 to M100.◀
NOTE
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is a risk of
property damage. Do not fill with fuel that does
not comply with the minimum quality.◀
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
Seite 198
Mobility Fuel
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Recommended fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Seite 199
Fuel Mobility
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Tire inflation pressure
Safety information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
WARNING
A tire with low or missing tire inflation
pressure impacts handling, such as steering
and braking response. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
sure, and correct it as needed, e.g., twice a
month and before a long trip.◀
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐
fications relate to cold tires or tires at ambient
temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire
Monitor.
For Tire Pressure Monitor: perform a reset of
the Tire Pressure Monitor after adjusting tire
pressure to a new value.
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 201, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 201, and adjust as necessary.
Seite 200
Mobility Wheels and tires
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
X4 xDrive28i
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/55 R 17 102 H
M+S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
225/60 R 17 99 H
M+S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 H
M+S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/45 R 19
98 W RSC
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 W RSC
- 2.2 / 32
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front: 245/40 R 20
99 Y XL Std/RSC
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 275/35 R 20
102 Y XL Std/RSC
- 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 ZR
20 99 Y XL Std
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 275/35 ZR
20 102 Y XL Std
- 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/35 R 21
96 Y XL RSC
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
- 2.8 / 41
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
X4 xDrive35i
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100
H M+S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S A/S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
Front: 245/45 R 19
98 W RSC
2.2 / 32 -
Seite 201
Wheels and tires Mobility
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 W RSC
- 2.2 / 32
Front: 245/40 R 20
99 Y XL Std/RSC
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/35 R 20
102 Y XL Std/RSC
- 2.6 / 38
Front: 245/40 ZR
20 99 Y XL Std
2,4 / 36 -
Rear: 275/35 ZR
20 102 Y XL Std
- 2.6 / 38
Front: 245/35 R 21
96 Y XL RSC
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
- 2.8 / 41
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
X4 M40i
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100
H M+S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S A/S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL RSC
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front: 245/45 R 19
98 W RSC
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 W RSC
- 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 R 20
99 Y XL Std/RSC
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/35 R 20
102 Y XL Std/RSC
- 2.6 /38
Front: 245/40 ZR
20 99 Y XL Std
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/35 ZR
20 102 Y XL Std
- 2.6 / 38
Front: 245/35 R 21
96 Y XL RSC
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
- 3.0 / 44
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Seite 202
Mobility Wheels and tires
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
X4 xDrive28i
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/55 R 17 102 H
M+S RSC
2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38
225/60 R 17 99 H
M+S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 H
M+S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S A/S RSC
2.4 / 35 2.8 / 41
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL RSC
2.6 / 38 3.0 / 44
Front: 245/45 R 19
98 W RSC
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 W RSC
- 2.6 / 38
Front: 245/40 R 20
99 Y XL Std/RSC
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/35 R 20
102 Y XL Std/RSC
- 2.6 / 38
Front: 245/40 ZR
20 99 Y XL Std
2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/35 ZR
20 102 Y XL Std
- 2.6 / 38
Front: 245/35 R 21
96 Y XL RSC
2.6 / 38 -
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
- 3.0 / 44
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
X4 xDrive35i
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100
H M+S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S A/S RSC
2.6 / 38 3.0 / 44
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL RSC
2.8 / 41 3.2 / 46
Front: 245/45 R 19
98 W RSC
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 W RSC
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 245/40 R 20
99 Y XL Std/RSC
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 275/35 R 20
102 Y XL Std/RSC
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 245/40 ZR
20 99 Y XL Std
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 275/35 ZR
20 102 Y XL Std
- 2.8 / 41
Seite 203
Wheels and tires Mobility
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front: 245/35 R 21
96 Y XL RSC
2.8 / 41 -
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
- 3.2 / 46
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
X4 M40i
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100
H M+S RSC
245/50 R 18 100 V
M+S A/S RSC
2.6 / 38 3.0 / 44
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL RSC
2.8 / 41 3.2 / 46
Front: 245/45 R 19
98 W RSC
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 W RSC
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 245/40 R 20
99 Y XL Std/RSC
2.6 / 38 -
Rear: 275/35 R 20
102 Y XL Std/RSC
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 245/40 ZR
20 99 Y XL Std
2.6 / 38 -
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Rear: 275/35 ZR
20 102 Y XL Std
- 2.8 / 41
Front: 245/35 R 21
96 Y XL RSC
2.8 / 41 -
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
- 3.2 / 46
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18 104
M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 2116
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
Seite 204
Mobility Wheels and tires
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
2116: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
DOT … 2116: the tire was manufactured in the
21st week of 2016.
Recommendation
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera‐
ture A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how‐
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris‐
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Mo‐
tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
Band A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 208, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.
Seite 205
Wheels and tires Mobility
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.12 inches/3 mm.
There is an increased risk of hydroplaning if
the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in‐
ches/3 mm.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 inches/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 inches/4 mm, tires
are less suitable for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in‐
ches/1.6 mm.
They are marked on the side of the tire with
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can, e.g., be caused by driving over
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
Safety information
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is a risk of an accident. If tire
damage is suspected while driving, immedi‐
ately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and
tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully
to the nearest dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Have vehicle towed or transported as
needed.◀
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is a risk of an accident. Do not
repair damaged tires, but have them re‐
placed.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 206
Mobility Wheels and tires
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Wheel and tire combination
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
the function of a variety of systems such as
ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, e.g., due to contact with the body due to
tolerances despite the same official size rating.
There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you
use wheels and tires that have been recom‐
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your
vehicle type.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, BMW recommends certain
tire brands. These can be identified by a star
on the tire sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a corresponding information label/
sticker in the field of view. The label is available
from a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere
to the permissible maximum speed.
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Further information is availa‐
ble from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 207
Wheels and tires Mobility
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated between
the axles to achieve even wear. Further infor‐
mation is available from a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure
and correct, if needed.
Rotating the tires between the axes is not per‐
missible on vehicles with different tire sizes or
rim sizes on the front and rear axles.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Run-flat tires
Label
RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐
porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐
cial rims.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driving
with a flat tire.
Changing run-flat tires
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
additional questions at any time.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
The compressor can be used to check the tire
inflation pressure.
General information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
Seite 208
Mobility Wheels and tires
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
electronics checked at the next opportu‐
nity and have them replaced, if needed.
Storage
The Mobility System is located under the
cargo floor panel.
Sealant container
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Compressor
1 Holder for sealant container
2 Compressor
3 Connector/cable for socket
4 Connection hose
5 On/off switch
6 Inflation pressure dial
7 Reduce inflation pressure
Filling the tire with sealant
1.
Shake the sealant container.
2. Pull the connection hose fully out of the
compressor housing. Do not kink the hose.
Seite 209
Wheels and tires Mobility
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
3. Screw the connection hose onto the con‐
nector of the sealant container.
4. Insert the sealant container on the com‐
pressor housing in an upright position.
5. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking
wheel.
6. With the compressor switched off, insert
the plug into the power socket inside the
vehicle.
7. With the ignition turned on or the engine
running, switch on the compressor.
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
NOTE
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐
nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
Seite 210
Mobility Wheels and tires
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
sor at this point.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
reached:
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Stowing the Mobility System
1.
Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the wheel.
2. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the sealant container.
3. Connect the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer previously connected to the tire
valve with the available connector on the
sealant container.
This prevents leftover sealant from escap‐
ing from the container.
4. Wrap the empty sealant container in suita‐
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo
area.
5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
cle.
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Correcting the tire inflation pressure
1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com‐
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to
2.5 bar.
▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition
turned on or the engine running, switch
on the compressor.
▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
ton on the compressor.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System as soon as
possible.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on un‐
suitable tires, the snow chains can come into
contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of property damage. Only mount
Seite 211
Wheels and tires Mobility
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
snow chains on tires that are designated by
their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
snow chains.◀
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 205/65 R 17.
▷ 225/60 R 17.
▷ 245/50 R 18.
▷ 245/45 R 19.
Do not mount snow chains on size 245/55 R
17 tires.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed ac‐
cording to the snow chain manufacturer's in‐
structions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control, if needed.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire
does not always need to be changed immedi‐
ately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat
tire.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
On soft or slippery ground, e.g., snow,
ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away.
There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the
tire/wheel on a flat, solid and slip-resistant sur‐
face.◀
WARNING
The vehicle jack is only provided for
short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
changes. Even if all safety measures are ob‐
served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall‐
ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is
raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not
start the engine.◀
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the
vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
jack.◀
WARNING
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
designated jacking point, damage to the vehi‐
cle may occur while cranking the vehicle up, or
the vehicle jack can slip away. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the vehicle jack is inserted into the jacking
point next to the wheel house while cranking
the vehicle up.◀
Securing the vehicle against rolling
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad‐
ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling
away when changing a wheel.
Seite 212
Mobility Wheels and tires
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
On a level surface
Place chocks or other suitable objects, for ex‐
ample a rock, in front of and behind the wheel
that is diagonally opposite to the wheel that
you wish to change.
On slight down-hill grades
If a wheel needs to be changed on a slight
down-hill grade, place wheel chocks or other
suitable objects, e.g. a stone, under the wheels
of the front and rear axle.
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Change the wheel as far away as possible
from passing traffic.
▷ Park the vehicle on solid, non-slip and level
ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or selector lever position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ Depending on the equipment version, get
tools and the emergency wheel from the
vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
reach its carrying capacity because of the
restricted height.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll‐
ing.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the positions shown.
Jacking up the vehicle
1.
Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the crank, arrow 2, with
the other hand.
WARNING
Hands and fingers can be jammed
when using the vehicle jack. There is a risk
of injury. Comply with the described hand
Seite 213
Wheels and tires Mobility
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
position and do not change this position
while using the vehicle jack.◀
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point closest to the
wheel to be changed.
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the
crank clockwise.
4. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot is ex‐
tended vertically.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle
jack.
6. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire
surface of the jack is in contact with the
ground and the wheel in question is raised
a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the
ground.
Wheel mounting
Mount a maximum of one emergency wheel.
1.
Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.
2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and hand-tighten at least two bolts in a
crosswise pattern.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve‐
hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐
companying lug bolts may have to be used
as well.
3. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
Seite 214
Mobility Wheels and tires
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
4. Turn the crank of the vehicle jack counter‐
clockwise to retract the vehicle jack and
lower the vehicle.
5. Remove the vehicle jack.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of its
size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Drive to the nearest dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop to have the damaged tire replaced.
Seite 215
Wheels and tires Mobility
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Washer fluid reservoir
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
5 Coolant reservoir
6 Oil filler neck
Hood
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage vehicle compo‐
nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a
risk of personal and property damage. The
manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in
the engine compartment be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
Seite 216
Mobility Engine compartment
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
WARNING
The engine compartment accommo‐
dates moving components. Certain compo‐
nents in the engine compartment can also
move with the vehicle switched off, e.g., the ra‐
diator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach
into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of
clothing and hair away from moving parts.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, e.g., locking
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk
of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep these areas clear.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor‐
rectly close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when open‐
ing and closing the hood. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the area of movement of
the hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Opening the hood
1. Pull the lever.
2. Press the release handle and open the
hood.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Seite 217
Engine compartment Mobility
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx.
16 inches/40 cm and push down on it to lock it
fully.
The hood must engage.
Seite 218
Mobility Engine compartment
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
the driving style and driving conditions.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
the following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐
fied as not suitable.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil
measurement.
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles:
▷ Status display.
▷ Detailed measurement.
Electronic oil measurement
Status display
The concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.
Requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
is displayed.
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
perform a detailed measurement.
Displaying the engine oil level
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Engine oil level display messages
Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention
to these messages.
If the engine oil level is too low within the next
125 miles/200 km, add engine oil.
A red indicator lamp indicates too high
engine oil pressure.
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Immediately add engine oil.◀
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Seite 219
Engine oil Mobility
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of property damage. Do not add too much en‐
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Detailed measurement
Concept
In the detailed measurement the engine oil
level is checked when the vehicle is stationary,
and displayed via a scale.
Gasoline engine:
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a Check Control message is displayed.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
General information
A detailed measurement is only possible with
certain engines.
Requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in
selector lever position N or P and accelera‐
tor pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐
perature.
Performing a detailed measurement
In order to perform a detailed measurement of
the engine oil level:
1.
"Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Time: approx. 1 minute.
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
cle before engine oil is added.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating materials, e.g., oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
ents. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Observe the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage.
Add engine oil within the next
125 miles/200 km.◀
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of property damage. Do not add too much en‐
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 216.
Seite 220
Mobility Engine oil
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Opening the oil filler neck
1. Open the hood, refer to page 216.
2. Turn the oil filler neck counter-clockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Safety information
NOTE
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
oil additives.◀
NOTE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of property damage. When selecting an engine
oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐
rect oil rating.◀
Suitable engine oil types
You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐
ing oil rating standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
The oil rating BMW Longlife-14 FE+ is only
suitable for particular gasoline engines.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils is available
at a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
API SL or superior oil rating.
Viscosity grades
Gasoline engine:
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE
0W-30 or SAE 0W-20. Alternatively, also en‐
gine oils with viscosity grades SAE 5W-20,
SAE 5W-30, SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 can
be used.
The viscosity grades SAE 0W-20 or SAE
5W-20 are only suitable for particular engines.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Engine oil change
NOTE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.◀
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer’s service center or another
Seite 221
Engine oil Mobility
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
qualified service center or repair shop change
the engine oil.
Seite 222
Mobility Engine oil
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
General information
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open
the cooling system with the engine cooled
down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of property damage. Do not al‐
low additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐
tives only.◀
Coolant level
Overview
Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐
ant reservoir is located on the right side or the
left side of the engine compartment.
Checking
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks
in the filler neck.
Seite 223
Coolant Mobility
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click.
The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
the lid must point towards one another.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 224
Mobility Coolant
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of the vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐
nizes the maintenance requirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
Information on service requirements can be
displayed on the Control Display.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi‐
cle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
Seite 225
Maintenance Mobility
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Safety information
NOTE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an
intricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system.
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a
dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or other persons
that have the specialized training and equip‐
ment for purposes of properly utilizing the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Seite 226
Mobility Maintenance
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located behind
the left folding cover in the cargo area.
Wiper blade replacement
Safety information
NOTE
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
shield can be damaged. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐
placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
Replacing the wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer
to page 76, the wiper arms.
2. Fold up the wipers.
3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐
sition.
4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
Lamp and bulb replacement
General information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have the relevant work carried out a deal‐
Seite 227
Replacing components Mobility
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
A spare lamp box is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 228.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source. These light-emitting diodes, which are
related to conventional lasers, are officially
designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 228.
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐
densation evaporates after a short time. The
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the lights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, e.g., water droplets
in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends having it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Headlight setting
The headlight adjustments can be affected by
changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight
adjustment was changed, have it checked and,
if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
Lights and bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a
risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they
have cooled off.◀
WARNING
Work on switched-on lighting systems
can cause short circuits. There is a risk of in‐
jury or risk of property damage. When working
on the lighting system, switch off the lamps in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
turer's instructions.◀
NOTE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not hold
new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean
cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by
its base.◀
Xenon headlights
DANGER
There can be high voltage in the lighting
system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that the
work on the lighting system including bulb re‐
placement be performed by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
WARNING
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. Do not look directly into the headlights
or other light sources. Do not remove the LED
covers.◀
Seite 228
Mobility Replacing components
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Front lights, bulb replacement
Halogen headlights
Overview
1 High beams/headlight flasher
2 Low beams
3 Turn signal/side marker light
4 Parking lights
5 Daytime running lights
Accessing the low beams and parking
lights
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 228.
1.
Open the hood, refer to page 216.
2. Turn the cover counterclockwise and re‐
move.
3. The upper bulb is the low beam and the
lower bulb is the parking lamp.
Low beams
55-watt bulb, H7.
1. Tip the connector with the bulb down
slightly and pull out carefully.
2. Pull the bulb off the connector and insert
the new bulb.
3. Install the new bulb in reverse order of re‐
moval.
4. Place the cover according to the arrow
markings on the headlight housing.
5. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Parking lights
5-watt bulb, W5W.
1.
Remove the bulb holder.
2. Carefully remove the bulb from the socket.
3. Install the new bulb in reverse order of re‐
moval.
4. Place the cover according to the arrow
markings on the headlight housing.
5. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Accessing the high beams/headlight
flasher and daytime running lights
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 228.
1.
Open the hood, refer to page 216.
2. Turn the cover counterclockwise and re‐
move.
3. The upper bulb is the high beam/headlight
flasher and the lower bulb is the daytime
running lights.
Seite 229
Replacing components Mobility
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
High beams/headlight flasher
55-watt bulb, H7.
1. Tip the connector with the bulb up slightly
and pull out carefully.
2. Pull the bulb off the connector and insert
the new bulb.
3. Install the new bulb in reverse order of re‐
moval.
4. Place the cover according to the arrow
markings on the headlight housing.
5. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Daytime running lights
21-watt bulb, W21W.
1.
Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and
remove.
2. Carefully remove the bulb from the socket.
3. Install the new bulb in reverse order of re‐
moval.
4. Place the cover according to the arrow
markings on the headlight housing.
5. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Xenon headlights
Safety information
DANGER
There can be high voltage in the lighting
system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that the
work on the lighting system including bulb re‐
placement be performed by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Overview
1 Parking lights / daytime running lights
2 Low beams/high beams/headlight flasher
3 Turn signal/side marker light
Xenon headlights
Low beams and high beams are designed with
xenon technology.
The parking lights and daylight running lights
are made using LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
LED headlights
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
All front lamps and side turn signals are de‐
signed with LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Halogen front fog lights
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 228.
Seite 230
Mobility Replacing components
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
35-watt bulb, H8.
1. Insert the screwdriver from the onboard
vehicle tool kit, with the flat side on the clip,
arrow 1.
2. Turn the screwdriver by 90°, arrow 2.
3. Remove the front fog lamp toward the
front.
4. Detach the connector.
5. Turn the bulb bracket and remove it.
6. Remove the bulb and replace it.
7. Proceed in reverse order to insert the front
fog lamp. Note the guide rails in doing so.
LED front fog lights
These front fog lights are made using LED
technology. In the case of a malfunction, con‐
tact a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Turn signal
General information
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 228.
The turn signals are located next to each low
beam in the engine compartment.
21-watt bulb, PY 21W.
Replacement
1.
Open the hood, refer to page 216.
2. Turn the bulb with the socket counter‐
clockwise and carefully remove.
3. Push the bulb down slightly and unscrew
from the socket.
4. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse
order of removal.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
LED technology. In the case of a malfunction,
contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 231
Replacing components Mobility
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
Overview
1 Turn signal
2 Backup lamp
3 Inside brake lamp
4 Rear lamp
5 Brake light
Bulb replacement, exterior tail lamps
General information
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 228.
Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21W.
Outer brake lamp: 24-watt bulb, PW24W.
The rear lamp features LED technology. In the
case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Removing the exterior tail lamp
1.
Open the tailgate.
2. Insert the screwdriver from the onboard
vehicle tool kit, refer to page 227, front‐
ward at an angle into the cover opening, ar‐
row 1.
3. Pry the cover out of the lower plug connec‐
tor, arrow 2.
▷ Left vehicle side: pry to the right.
▷ Right vehicle side: pry to the left.
4. To unfasten the upper plug connector, ar‐
row 3, carefully remove the cover, arrow 4.
5. Loosen the two nuts with the screwdriver
handle, arrows.
6. Remove the tail lamp from the body and
detach the connector from the bulb holder.
Seite 232
Mobility Replacing components
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Replacing the bulbs
1. Loosen the three fasteners, arrows 1, on
the bulb holder and remove the bulb holder
from the tail lamp, arrow 2.
2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
The turn signal is the upper bulb and the
brake lamp is the lower bulb on the bulb
holder.
3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐
teners.
Installing the tail lamp
1.
Attach the connector to the tail lamp.
2. Place the cover on the three fixing points,
arrows, and push in. Make sure that the tail
lamp engages in the fasteners.
3. Screw the two nuts tight and mount the
cover.
Lights in the tailgate
General information
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 228.
Reversing lights: 21-watt bulb, P21W
Inner brake lamp: 21-watt bulb, H21W.
Accessing the lights
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Pull out the cover at the recessed grip, ar‐
row.
3. Detach the connector.
Replacing the reversing lamp and inner
brake lamp
1.
Detach the bulb holder from the tail lamp.
The reversing lamp is the upper bulb and
the inner brake lamp is the lower bulb on
the bulb holder.
2. To replace the reversing lamp, pull off the
bulb carefully.
To replace the inner brake lamp, push the
bulb down and turn it to the left.
Installing the bulb holder
1.
Attach the connector to the tail lamp.
2. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder.
Ensure that the bulb holder is firmly at‐
tached.
Seite 233
Replacing components Mobility
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Rear lights and license plate lights
Observe the safety information, refer to
page 228.
These lights are made using LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Battery replacement
NOTE
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐
cle functions. There is a risk of personal and
property damage. Only vehicle batteries that
are compatible with your vehicle type should
be installed in your vehicle. Information on
compatible vehicle batteries is available at your
dealer’s service center.◀
After a battery replacement, the manufacturer
of your vehicle recommends that the vehicle
battery be registered on the vehicle by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop to ensure that all comfort
features are fully available and that any Check
Control messages of these comfort features
are no longer displayed.
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a
red indicator lamp.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
Safety information
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 238, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to
be newly initialized or individual settings up‐
dated, for example:
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof and sliding visor: initialize
the system.
Seite 234
Mobility Replacing components
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
General information
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box
in the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.
Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐
stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀
In the glove compartment
Swing the cover down, arrow.
In the cargo area
Open the cover on the right side trim, arrow,
and remove the sound insulation.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 235
Replacing components Mobility
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
The red lamp in the button flashes with the
hazard warning flashers switched on.
Intelligent emergency call
Concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be made through the system.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐
ditions.
Overview
SOS button in the roofliner
Requirements
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Initiating an Emergency Request
1.
Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the
button lights up green.
▷ The LED illuminates green when the Emer‐
gency Request has been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
Display, the Emergency Request can be
aborted.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
established.
When the Emergency Request is received
at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
Seite 236
Mobility Breakdown assistance
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW
Response Center which serves to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E.g.,
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.
▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW
Response Center can no longer be heard
via the speaker, you can nevertheless still
be heard at the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Roadside Assistance
Service availability
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐
down.
Roadside Assistance
The Roadside Assistance phone number can
be viewed via iDrive or a connection to Road‐
side Assistance can be established directly.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located behind the left-
hand cover in the cargo area.
To remove, loosen the bracket.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located behind the left-hand
cover in the cargo area.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
Seite 237
Breakdown assistance Mobility
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Preparation
NOTE
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
1.
Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a
risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order
during connection.◀
The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐
partment acts as the battery's positive termi‐
nal.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
Connecting the cables
1.
Pull off the lid of the BMW starting aid ter‐
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
Seite 238
Mobility Breakdown assistance
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Tow-starting and towing
Safety information
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g., approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is a risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀
Steptronic transmission: transporting
the vehicle
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Safety information
NOTE
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
a risk of property damage. The vehicle should
only be transported on a loading platform.◀
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
NOTE
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is a risk of property
damage. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐
sitioning the vehicle.
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a disabled vehicle from the danger
area, it can be pushed for a short distance. The
vehicle can only be pushed in selector lever
position N.
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll, pro‐
ceed as follows:
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Engage selector lever position N.
If there is a malfunction, it may happen that
you cannot change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, re‐
fer to page 80, if needed.
Seite 239
Breakdown assistance Mobility
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden‐
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign
or a warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make
sure that the gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be
towed.◀
NOTE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can
occur. There is a risk of property damage. Cor‐
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting.◀
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
refer to page 227, are together in the cargo
area.
Use of the tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Use tow fitting located in the front only for
positioning the vehicle.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Safety information
NOTE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there can be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is a risk of property damage.
Observe the notes on using the tow fitting.◀
Seite 240
Mobility Breakdown assistance
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the Steptronic transmission.
Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.
Seite 241
Breakdown assistance Mobility
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
Vehicle washes
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
leaves in the area below the windshield when
the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.
Steam blaster and high-pressure
washer
Safety information
NOTE
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high.
There is a risk of property damage. Maintain
sufficient distance and do not spray too long
continuously. Follow the operating instructions
for the high-pressure washer.◀
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTE
Improper use of automatic vehicle
washes can cause damage to the vehicle.
There is a risk of property damage. Information
the following instructions:
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
▷ Deactivate rain sensor, if necessary, to
avoid damage to the wiper system.◀
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
tion on obstacle detection, e.g., in vehicle
washes, to reduce PDC false alarms.
Before driving into a vehicle wash
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
vehicle wash, take the following steps:
Steptronic transmission:
1.
Drive into the vehicle wash.
2. Engage selector lever position N.
3. Deactivate Automatic Hold, refer to
page 72.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Switch the engine off.
Seite 242
Mobility Care
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
In this way, the ignition remains switched
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
played.
NOTE
Selector lever position P is automati‐
cally engaged when the ignition is
switched off. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not switch drive-ready state
off in vehicle washes.◀
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock
the vehicle.
Exiting a vehicle wash
To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐
sion:
1.
Make sure that the vehicle key is in the ve‐
hicle.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐
ping on the brake turns the ignition off.
Selector lever position
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
Headlamps
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
acidic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied, e.g.,
from insects, with shampoo and wash off
with water.
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced. The heat generated during
braking dries brake discs and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from BMW.
Safety information
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the in‐
terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
low the instructions on the container.◀
Vehicle paint
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your vehicle care to
these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Seite 243
Care Mobility
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Upholstery material care
General information
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage
stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth
with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
Safety information
NOTE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
a risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐
cro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disk.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use
only water and suitable cleaning agents for
cleaning. The manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends original BMW care products.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Plastic components
NOTE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
plastic parts. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen
cloth lightly with water.◀
Seite 244
Mobility Care
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Plastic components are e.g.:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Lamp lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Safety belts
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect
of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution
for cleaning the safety belts.◀
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g., for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the vehicle's
interior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Displays/Screens/protective glass of
the Head-up Display
NOTE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
cloth.◀
NOTE
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Head-up Display:
Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
play using a microfiber cloth and commercially
available dish-washing soap.
Long-term vehicle storage
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be
taken. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Seite 245
Care Mobility
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable country provisions
must be observed.
General information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
e.g., due to the selected special equipment,
country version or country-specific measure‐
ment method. Detailed values can be found in
the approval documents, on labels on the vehi‐
cle or can be obtained from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority over the information in this
Owner's Manual.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, e.g., a roof antenna, roof racks
or spoiler. The heights can deviate, e.g., due to
the selected special equipment, tires, load and
chassis version.
BMW X4
Width with mirrors inches/mm 82.2/2,089
Width without mirrors inches/mm 74.1-74.8/1,881-1,901
Height inches/mm 63.9/1,624
Length inches/mm 184.3-184.5/4,680-4,686
Wheelbase inches/mm 110.6/2,810
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 39.1/11.9
Seite 248
Reference Technical data
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Weights
X4 xDrive28i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,060/2,295
Load lbs/kg 910/413
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,370/1,075
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,820/1,279
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Cargo area capacity cu ft 17.7-49.4
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 17.6-49.4/500-1,400
X4 xDrive35i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,180/2,350
Load lbs/kg 910/413
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,490/1,129
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,820/1,279
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Cargo area capacity cu ft 17.7-49.4
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 17.6-49.4/500-1,400
X4 M40i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,260/2,386
Load lbs/kg 910/413
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,540/1,152
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,900/1,315
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Cargo area capacity cu ft 17.7-49.4
Canada: cargo area capacity cu ft/l 17.6-49.4/500-1,400
Seite 249
Technical data Reference
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Seite 251
Appendix Reference
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 127
ACC, Active Cruise Control
with Stop&Go function 134
Acceleration Assistant, see
Launch Control 80
Accessories and parts 8
Activated-charcoal filter 162
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 124
Active Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function,
ACC 134
Adaptive brake lights, see
Brake force display 126
Adaptive Light Control 100
Additives, oil 221
Adjustments, seats/head re‐
straints 51
After washing vehicle 243
Airbags 103
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 104
Air circulation, see Recircu‐
lated-air mode 158, 161
Air, dehumidifying, see Cool‐
ing function 158, 161
Air distribution,
manual 159, 162
Air flow, automatic climate
control 159, 162
Air pressure, tires 200
Air vents, see Ventilation 163
Alarm system 46
Alarm, unintentional 47
All around the roofliner 17
All-season tires, see Winter
tires 207
All-wheel-drive 129
Alternative oil types 221
Ambient light 102
Antifreeze, washer fluid 76
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 127
Anti-slip control, see
DSC 127
App, BMW Driver’s Guide 6
Approach control warning
with City light braking func‐
tion 113
Approved axle load 249
Armrest, see Center arm‐
rest 174
Arrival time 93
Ash tray 167
Assistance, Roadside Assis‐
tance 237
Assistance when driving
off 133
AUTO H button 71
AUTO H button, see Auto‐
matic Hold 71
AUTO intensity 161
Automatic climate con‐
trol 157
Automatic climate control
with enhanced features 160
Automatic cruise control with
Stop&Go function 134
Automatic Curb Monitor 59
Automatic deactivation,
Front-seat passenger air‐
bags 105
Automatic headlamp con‐
trol 99
Automatic Hold 71
Automatic locking 46
Automatic recirculated-air
control 161
Automatic tailgate 42
Automatic transmission, see
Steptronic transmission 77
Automatic vehicle wash 242
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 161
AUTO program, climate con‐
trol 158
AUTO program, intensity 161
Auto Start/Stop function 68
Auto washing 242
AUX-IN port, general informa‐
tion 169
Average fuel consumption 92
Average speed 93
Axle loads, weights 249
B
Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
bar support 53
Backrest, width 53
Bad road trips 180
Band-aids, see First-aid
kit 237
Battery replacement, vehicle
battery 234
Battery replacement, vehicle
remote control 36
Battery, vehicle 234
Being towed, see Tow-start‐
ing and towing 239
Belts, safety belts 54
Beverage holder, cup
holder 174
Blocking, power window 49
BMW Assist, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
BMW Driver’s Guide app 6
BMW Homepage 6
Seite 252
Reference Everything from A to Z
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
BMW Internet page 6
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 225
Bonus range, ECO PRO 190
Bottle holder, see Cup
holder 174
Brake assistant 127
Brake discs, break-in 180
Brake force display 126
Brake lights, adaptive 126
Brake lights, brake force dis‐
play 126
Brake pads, break-in 180
Braking, information 182
Breakdown assis‐
tance 236, 237
Break-in 180
Brightness of Control Dis‐
play 95
Bulb replacement 227
Bulb replacement, front 229
Bulb replacement, rear 232
Bulbs and lights 227
Button, RES 137
Button, Start/Stop 66
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐
ing 237
C
California Proposition 65
Warning 8
Calling up mirror adjust‐
ment 46
Calling up seat adjust‐
ment 46
Camera-based assistance
systems, see Intelligent
Safety 112
Camera lenses, care 245
Camera, rearview cam‐
era 146
Camera, Side View 151
Camera, Top View 149
Can holder, see Cup
holder 174
Care, displays 245
Care, vehicle 243
Care, washing the vehi‐
cle 242
Cargo 184
Cargo area 170
Cargo area, enlarging 171
Cargo area, loading 185
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 175
Cargo cover 170
Cargo, stowing and secur‐
ing 185
Cargo straps 185
Carpet, care 245
Catalytic converter, see Hot
exhaust system 181
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 225
CD/multimedia, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
Center armrest 174
Center console 16
Central locking system 38
Central screen, see Control
Display 18
Changes, technical, see Own
Safety 7
Changing parts 227
Changing wheels 212
Changing wheels/tires 206
Chassis number, see Vehicle
identification number 10
Check Control 83
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 219
Children, seating position 62
Children, transporting
safely 62
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 64
Child restraint system 62
Child restraint systems,
mounting 63
Child safety locks 65
Child seat, mounting 63
Child seats 62
Chrome parts, care 244
Cigarette lighter 167
City light braking function
warning with braking func‐
tion 116
Cleaning, displays 245
Climate control 157, 160
Closing the tailgate with no-
touch activation 40
Clothes hooks 175
Coasting 191
Coasting with engine decou‐
pled, coasting 191
Coasting with idling en‐
gine 191
Cockpit 14
Combination switch, see Turn
signals 73
Combination switch, see
Wiper system 73
Comfort Access 39
COMFORT program, driving
dynamics 132
Compartments in the
doors 174
Compass 93
Compressor 208
Condensation on win‐
dows 159, 162
Condensation under the vehi‐
cle 183
Condition Based Service
CBS 225
Configuring driving pro‐
gram 132
Confirmation signal 45
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
ConnectedDrive Services
Container for washer fluid 76
Seite 253
Everything from A to Z Reference
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Continued driving with a flat
tire 109, 112
Control Display 18
Control Display, settings 94
Controller 19
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 127
Convenient opening with the
remote control 35
Coolant 223
Coolant temperature 87
Cooling function 158, 161
Cooling, maximum 161
Cooling system 223
Cornering light 100
Corrosion on brake discs 183
Cosmetic mirror 167
Courtesy lamps during un‐
locking 35
Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐
cle locked 35
Cruise control 140
Cruise control, active with
Stop&Go function 134
Cruise control with distance
control, see active cruise
control, ACC 134
Cruise control without dis‐
tance control, see cruise
control 140
Cruising range 88
Cup holder 174
Current fuel consumption 88
D
Damage, tires 206
Damping control, dy‐
namic 130
Data, technical 248
Date 95
Date display 88
Daytime running lights 100
Daytime running lights, bulb
replacement 229
Defrosting, see Windows, de‐
frosting 159, 162
Dehumidifying, air 158, 161
Deleting personal data 25
Deletion of personal data 25
Destination distance 93
Digital clock 88
Dimensions 248
Dimmable exterior mirrors 60
Dimmable interior mirror 60
Direction indicator, see Turn
signals 73
Display, electronic, instru‐
ment cluster 82
Display in windshield 96
Display lighting, see Instru‐
ment lighting 102
Displays, care 245
Disposal, coolant 224
Disposal, vehicle battery 235
Distance control, see
PDC 143
Distance to destination 93
Divided screen view, split
screen 23
Door key, see Remote con‐
trol 37
Downhill control 129
Drive-off assistant 133
Drive-off assistant, see
DSC 127
Driver assistance, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 112
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 131
Driving instructions, break-
in 180
Driving instructions, ECO
PRO 190
Driving mode 131
Driving notes, general 181
Driving on bad roads 180
Driving on racetracks 183
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 127
Driving tips 181
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 127
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 128
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 130
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 127
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 128
E
ECO PRO 188
ECO PRO, bonus range 190
ECO PRO display 188
ECO PRO driving mode 188
ECO PRO mode 188
ECO PRO tips 190
Efficiency display, ECO
PRO 190
EfficientDynamics info 191
Electronic displays, instru‐
ment cluster 82
Electronic oil measure‐
ment 219
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, see DSC 127
Emergency release, fuel filler
flap 197
Emergency Request 236
Emergency service, see
Roadside Assistance 237
Emergency unlocking, tail‐
gate 43
Emergency unlocking, trans‐
mission lock 80
Energy Control 88
Energy recovery 89
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 68
Engine, automatic switch-
off 68
Engine compartment 216
Engine compartment, work‐
ing in 216
Seite 254
Reference Everything from A to Z
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Engine coolant 223
Engine idling when driving,
coasting 191
Engine oil 219
Engine oil, adding 220
Engine oil additives 221
Engine oil change 221
Engine oil filler neck 220
Engine oil temperature 87
Engine oil types, alterna‐
tive 221
Engine oil types, suitable 221
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 237
Engine start, see Starting the
engine 67
Engine stop 67
Engine temperature 87
Entering a vehicle wash 242
Equipment, interior 165
Error displays, see Check
Control 83
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, see DSC 127
Exchanging wheels/tires 206
Exhaust system 181
Exiting a vehicle wash 242
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 60
Exterior mirrors 59
External start 237
External temperature dis‐
play 87
External temperature warn‐
ing 87
Eyes for securing cargo 185
F
Failure message, see Check
Control 83
False alarm, see Unintentional
alarm 47
Fan, see Air flow 159, 162
Filler neck for engine oil 220
Fine wood, care 244
First-aid kit 237
Flat tire, changing
wheels 212
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 110
Flat tire, repairing 208
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 106
Flat tire, warning
lamp 108, 111
Flooding 182
Floor carpet, care 245
Floor mats, care 245
Fold-away position, wiper 76
Folding back rear seat back‐
rests 171
Foot brake 182
Front airbags 103
Front fog lamps, halogen,
bulb replacement 230
Front fog lamps, , LED, bulb
replacement 231
Front fog lights 101
Front lights 229
Front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation 105
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator lamp 106
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 110
Fuel 198
Fuel cap 196
Fuel consumption, see Aver‐
age fuel consumption 92
Fuel filler flap 196
Fuel gauge 87
Fuel quality 198
Fuel recommendation 198
Fuel, tank capacity 250
Functions and controls in the
center console 16
Functions and controls in the
cockpit 14
Fuse 235
G
Garage door opener, see Uni‐
versal Integrated Remote
Control 165
Gasoline 198
Gear change, Steptronic
transmission 78
Gear shift indicator 90
General driving notes 181
Glare shield 167
Glass sunroof, electric 49
Glass sunroof, initialize the
system 50
Glove compartment 173
GPS location, vehicle posi‐
tion 95
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 249
H
Halogen headlights, bulb re‐
placement 229
Handbrake, see Parking
brake 70
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 166
Hazard warning flashers 236
HDC Hill Descent Con‐
trol 129
Head airbags 103
Headlamp control, auto‐
matic 99
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture 99
Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
ture via remote control 36
Headlamps, care 243
Headlight flasher 73
Headlight flasher, bulb re‐
placement 229
Headlight glass 228
Headlights 229
Head restraints 51
Head restraints, front 56
Seite 255
Everything from A to Z Reference
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Head restraints, rear 57
Head-up Display 96
Head-up Display, care 245
Heavy cargo, stowing
cargo 185
High-beam Assistant 101
High beams 73
High beams/low beams, see
High-beam Assistant 101
High beams, bulb replace‐
ment 229
Hill Descent Control
HDC 129
Hills 182
Hill start assistant, see Drive-
off assistant 133
Holder for beverages 174
Homepage 6
Hood 216
Horn 14
Hot exhaust system 181
HUD Head-up Display 96
Hydroplaning 181
I
Ice warning, see External
temperature warning 87
Icy roads, see External tem‐
perature warning 87
Identification marks, tires 204
Identification number, see Ve‐
hicle identification num‐
ber 10
iDrive 18
Ignition key, see Remote con‐
trol 37
Ignition off 66
Ignition on 66
Indication of a flat
tire 108, 111
Indicator and alarm lamps,
see Check Control 83
Indicator lamp, see Check
Control 83
Individual air distribu‐
tion 159, 162
Individual settings, see Per‐
sonal Profile 43
Inflation pressure, tires 200
Inflation pressure warning,
tires 110
Info display, see On-Board
computer 92
Information 6
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 107
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 111
Instrument cluster 82
Instrument cluster, electronic
displays 82
Instrument lighting 102
Integrated key 37
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle 30
Intelligent emergency
call 236
Intelligent Safety 112
Intended use 7
Intensity, AUTO pro‐
gram 161
Interior equipment 165
Interior lights 102
Interior lights during unlock‐
ing 35
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 35
Interior mirror, automatic dim‐
ming feature 60
Interior mirror, manually dim‐
mable 60
Interior motion sensor 47
Internet page 6
Interval display, service re‐
quirements 89
Interval mode 74
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 213
Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐
sion 78
Jump-starting 237
K
Key/remote control 37
Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
cess 39
Key Memory, see Personal
Profile 43
Key, see Remote control 34
Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐
mission 78
Knee airbag 104
L
Label on recommended
tires 207
Lamp in the exterior mirror,
see Active Blind Spot De‐
tection 124
Lamp replacement 227
Lamp replacement, front 229
Lamp replacement, rear 232
Lane departure warning 122
Lane threshold, warning 122
Language on Control Dis‐
play 95
Lashing eyes 185
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 64
Launch Control 80
Leather, care 244
LEDs, light-emitting di‐
odes 228
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 25
Light 98
Light-alloy wheels, care 244
Light control 100
Seite 256
Reference Everything from A to Z
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Light-emitting diodes,
LEDs 228
Lighter 167
Lighting 98
Lights and bulbs 227
Light switch 98
Load 185
Loading 184
Locking, automatic 46
Locking, settings 45
Low beams 98
Low beams, automatic, see
High-beam Assistant 101
Lower back support 53
Luggage rack, see Roof-
mounted luggage rack 186
Lumbar support 53
M
Maintenance 225
Maintenance require‐
ments 225
Maintenance, service require‐
ments 89
Maintenance system,
BMW 225
Make-up mirror 167
Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 83
Manual air distribu‐
tion 159, 162
Manual air flow 159, 162
Manual brake, see Parking
brake 70
Manual mode, Steptronic
transmission 78
Manual operation, exterior
mirrors 59
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 197
Manual operation, Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC 144
Manual operation, rearview
camera 146
Manual operation, Top
View 149
Marking, run-flat tires 208
Master key, see Remote con‐
trol 37
Maximum cooling 161
Maximum speed, display 90
Maximum speed, winter
tires 207
Measurement, units of 95
Medical kit 237
Memory, seat, mirror 58
Menu in instrument clus‐
ter 91
Menus, operating, iDrive 18
Menus, see iDrive operating
concept 20
Messages, see Check Con‐
trol 83
Microfilter 159, 162
Minimum tread, tires 206
Mirror 59
Mirror memory 58
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 181
Mobility System 208
Modifications, technical, see
Own Safety 7
Moisture in headlight 228
Monitor, see Control Dis‐
play 18
Mounting of child restraint
systems 63
Moving sun visor 167
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 14
N
Navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
Neck restraints, front, see
Head restraints 56
Neck restraints, rear, see
Head restraints 57
Neutral cleaner, see Wheel
cleaner 244
New wheels and tires 206
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 226
OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐
agnosis 226
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 147
Octane rating, see Recom‐
mended fuel grade 199
Odometer 87
Office, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Offroad trips 180
Oil 219
Oil, adding 220
Oil additives 221
Oil change 221
Oil change interval, service
requirements 89
Oil filler neck 220
Oil types, alternative 221
Oil types, suitable 221
Old batteries, disposal 235
Onboard computer 92
Onboard computer, see On‐
board computer 92
Onboard monitor, see Control
Display 18
Onboard vehicle tool kit 227
Opening and closing 34
Opening the tailgate with no-
touch activation 40
Operating concept, iDrive 18
Optional equipment 7
Outside air, see Automatic re‐
circulated-air control 161
Overheating of engine, see
Coolant temperature 87
Own Safety 7
Seite 257
Everything from A to Z Reference
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
P
Paint, vehicle 243
Parallel parking assistant 152
Park Distance Control
PDC 143
Parked vehicle, condensa‐
tion 183
Parked-vehicle ventila‐
tion 163
Parking aid, see PDC 143
Parking assistant 152
Parking brake 70
Parking lights 98
Parking lights, bulb replace‐
ment 229
Parking with Automatic
Hold 71
Parts and accessories 8
Passenger side mirror, tilting
downward 59
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 147
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 143
Pedestrian warning with Ap‐
proach control 119
Performance Control 129
Personal Profile 43
Personal Profile, exporting
profiles 44
Personal Profile, importing
profiles 45
Pinch protection system,
glass sunroof 50
Pinch protection system, win‐
dows 48
Plastic, care 244
Power failure 234
Power sunroof, glass 49
Power windows 47
Prescribed engine oil
types 221
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 200
Pressure warning, tires 110
Profile, see Personal Pro‐
file 43
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 24
Protective function, glass
sunroof 50
Protective function, win‐
dows 48
Push-and-turn reel, refer to
controller 19
R
Racetrack operation 183
Radiator fluid 223
Radio-operated key, see Re‐
mote control 37
Radio-operated remote con‐
trol, opening/closing 34
Radio ready state 66
Radio, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication
Rain sensor 74
Ratchet straps 185
Rear lights 232
Rear socket 169
Rearview camera 146
Rearview mirror 59
Rear window de‐
froster 159, 162
Recirculated-air filter 162
Recirculated-air
mode 158, 161
Recommended fuel
grade 199
Recommended tire
brands 207
Refueling 196
Remaining range 88
Remote control/key 37
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 37
Remote control, opening/
closing 34
Remote control, univer‐
sal 165
Replacement fuse 235
Replacing parts 227
Replacing wheels/tires 206
Reporting safety malfunc‐
tions 10
RES button 137
RES button, see Active
Cruise Control, ACC 134
RES button, see Cruise con‐
trol 140
Reserve warning, see
Range 88
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 107
Retreaded tires 207
Roadside parking lights 99
Rolling code hand-held trans‐
mitter 166
RON recommended fuel
grade 199
Roofliner 17
Roof load capacity 249
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 186
RSC Run Flat System Com‐
ponent, see Run-flat
tires 208
Rubber components,
care 244
Run-flat tires 208
S
Safe braking 182
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passen‐
ger seat 55
Safety belts 54
Safety belts, care 245
Safety locks, doors, and win‐
dows 65
Safety switch, windows 49
Safety systems, airbags 103
Saving fuel 187
Seite 258
Reference Everything from A to Z
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Screen, see Control Dis‐
play 18
Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit 227
Sealant 208
Seat and mirror memory 58
Seat belts, see Safety
belts 54
Seat heating, front 54
Seat heating, rear 54
Seating position for chil‐
dren 62
Seats 51
Securing cargo 185
Selection list in instrument
cluster 91
Selector lever, Steptronic
transmission 78
Sensors, care 245
Service and warranty 8
Service requirements, Condi‐
tion Based Service
CBS 225
Service requirements, dis‐
play 89
Service, Roadside Assis‐
tance 237
Services, ConnectedDrive
Servotronic 131
SET button, see Active
Cruise Control, ACC 134
SET button, see Cruise con‐
trol 140
Settings, locking/unlock‐
ing 45
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 94
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
ror 58
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 79
Side airbags 103
Side View 150
Signaling, horn 14
Signals when unlocking 45
Sitting safely 51
Size 248
Ski and snowboard bag 172
Slide/tilt glass roof 49
Snow chains 211
Socket 168
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
nostics 226
SOS button 236
Spare fuse 235
Speed, average 93
Speed Limit Info 90
Speed Limit Info, com‐
puter 93
Speed limits, display 90
Speed warning 94
Split screen 23
SPORT+ - program, driving
dynamics 131
Sport displays, torque dis‐
play, performance dis‐
play 94
SPORT program, driving dy‐
namics 132
Sport program, transmis‐
sion 78
Sport steering, variable 130
Stability control systems 127
Standard equipment 7
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 68
Start/Stop button 66
Starting the engine 67
Status control display,
tires 107
Status information, iDrive 23
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Steering assistance 131
Steering wheel, adjusting 60
Steering wheel heating 61
Steptronic Sport transmis‐
sion, see Steptronic trans‐
mission 77
Steptronic transmission 77
Stopping the engine 67
Storage compartments 173
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 173
Storage, tires 208
Storing the vehicle 245
Stowing and securing
cargo 185
Suitable engine oil types 221
Summer tires, tread 206
Sun visor 167
Supplementary text mes‐
sages 86
Surround View 145
Switch for driving dynam‐
ics 131
Switch-on times, parked-car
ventilation 164
Switch, see Cockpit 14
Symbols 6
Symbols in the status field 23
SYNC program, automatic cli‐
mate control 162
T
Tachometer 87
Tailgate, automatic 42
Tailgate, closing with no-
touch activation 40
Tailgate, emergency unlock‐
ing 43
Tailgate, opening with no-
touch activation 40
Tailgate via remote con‐
trol 35
Tail lamps 232
Technical changes, see Own
Safety 7
Technical data 248
Telephone, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 158, 160
Temperature display for ex‐
ternal temperature 87
Seite 259
Everything from A to Z Reference
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Temperature, engine oil 87
Terminal, starting aid 238
Text messages, supplemen‐
tary 86
Theft alarm system, see
Alarm system 46
Thigh support 53
Tilt alarm sensor 47
Time 94
Time of arrival 93
Tire damage 206
Tire identification marks 204
Tire inflation pressure 200
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, see FTM 110
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 106
Tire repair kit, see Mobility
System 208
Tires, changing 206
Tire sealant, see Mobility
System 208
Tires, everything on wheels
and tires 200
Tires, run-flat tires 208
Tire tread 206
Tone, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication
Tool 227
Top View 148
Total vehicle weight 249
Touchpad 21
Towing 239
Tow-starting 239
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 106
Traction control 128
TRACTION, driving dynam‐
ics 128
Transmission lock, electronic
unlocking 80
Transmission, Steptronic
transmission 77
Transporting children
safely 62
Tread, tires 206
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 73
Trip odometer 87
Trip onboard computer 93
Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐
eter 87
Turning radius lines, rearview
camera 147
Turn signals, operation 73
U
Unintentional alarm 47
Units of measurement 95
Universal remote control 165
Unlock button, Steptronic
transmission 78
Unlocking, settings 45
Unpaved roads, cross-coun‐
try trips 180
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Upholstery care 244
USB interface, general infor‐
mation 169
USB port, see USB inter‐
face 169
Use, intended 7
V
Vanity mirror 167
Variable sport steering 130
Vehicle battery 234
Vehicle battery, replac‐
ing 234
Vehicle, break-in 180
Vehicle care 243
Vehicle care products 243
Vehicle features and op‐
tions 7
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 10
Vehicle jack 213
Vehicle key, see Remote con‐
trol 37
Vehicle paint 243
Vehicle position, GPS loca‐
tion 95
Vehicle storage 245
Vehicle wash 242
Vehicle, washing 242
Ventilation 163
Ventilation, see Parked-vehi‐
cle ventilation 163
VIN, see Vehicle identification
number 10
Voice activation system 27
W
Warning and indicator lamps,
see Check Control 83
Warning displays, see Check
Control 83
Warning lamp in the exterior
mirror, see Active Blind Spot
Detection 124
Warning messages, see
Check Control 83
Warning triangle 237
Warranty 7
Washer fluid 76
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 75
Washer system 73
Washing the vehicle 242
Water on roads 182
Weights 249
Welcome lights 99
Welcome lights during un‐
locking 35
Wheel cleaner 244
Wheels, changing 206
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 200
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 110
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 106
Seite 260
Reference Everything from A to Z
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
Window defroster,
rear 159, 162
Windows, powered 47
Windshield washer fluid 76
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 75
Windshield washer sys‐
tem 73
Windshield washer system,
see Washer/wiper sys‐
tem 73
Windshield wiper, see Wiper
system 73
Winter storage, care 245
Winter tires, suitable
tires 207
Winter tires, tread 206
Wiper 73
Wiper blades, replacing 227
Wiper fluid 76
Wiper, fold-away position 76
Wiper system 73
Wood, care 244
Word match concept 25
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
tool kit 227
X
xDrive 129
Xenon headlights, bulb re‐
placement 230
Seite 261
Everything from A to Z Reference
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
01 40 2 973 100 ue
*BL297310000O*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 973 100 - VI/16
